CLX-6200 Series
CLX-6240 Series
Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
To receive a more complete service, please
register your product at
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Basic features of this machine include:
FEATURES
CLX-6200ND
CLX-6200FX
CLX-6210FX
CLX-6240FX
USB 2.0
USB Memory Interface
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)
Hard Disk
O
O
O
O
O
Network Interface 802.11b/g wireless LAN
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN
Duplex (2-sided) printing
FAX
( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
•
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Following table offers the conventions of this guide:
CONVENTION
DESCRIPTION
EXAMPLE
Bold
Note
Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine.
Start
Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine
function and feature.
The date format may differ from
country to country
Caution
Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical
damage or malfunction.
Do not touch the green underside of
the toner cartridge.
Footnote
Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase.
a. pages per minute
(See page 1 for more
information)
Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information. (See page 1 for more information)
Features of your new laser product_3
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.
Quick Install Guide
Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.
Online User’s Guide
Printer Driver Help
Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your
machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.
This user’s guide also contains a Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.
Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a
printer driver help screen, click Help from the printer properties dialog box.
Samsung website
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
4_Features of your new laser product
safety information
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS
What the icons and signs in this user’s guide mean:
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety
precautions:
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.
Do NOT touch.
Follow directions explicitly.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others. Follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe
place for future reference.
1. Read and understand all instructions.
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only
a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,
creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.
Safety information_5
13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.
If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.
16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with
a
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.
17. Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication
configuration and etc)
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
6_Safety information
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.
MERCURY SAFETY
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws. (U.S.A only)
POWER SAVER
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
RECYCLING
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB
cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to
promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or
their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should
contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be
mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through
your local, free battery return system.
Safety information_7
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the
presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system
label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by
the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use
it. Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This
device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
8_Safety information
FAX BRANDING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission the following information:
(1) the date and time of transmission
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of
the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may
temporarily cease service, providing that they:
a) promptly notify the customer.
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with
your machine.
•
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency
number.
•
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
Safety information_9
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
•
•
•
Green and Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
10_Safety information
European Radio Approval Information
(for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are
present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
a
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European States qualified under wireless approvals:
EU
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions),
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland,
Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.
EEA/EFTA countries
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
European States with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power
such as wireless
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time.
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE STATEMENTS
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken
to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are
on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices
are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use
of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices,
ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of
a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are
in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use
it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
Safety information_11
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply
to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
12_Safety information
Safety information_13
contents
25
14_Contents
contents
50
Contents_15
contents
59
62
16_Contents
contents
File Policy
Contents_17
contents
106
CONTACT SAMSUNG WO1RLD0WI8DE
18_Contents
introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PRINTER OVERVIEW
Front view
Tray 1
Scanner glass
Scan unit
9
20
21
Document input tray
Document output tray
10
11
a. CLX-6200FX has the ADF function, while CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX,
Rear view
1
2
USB port
7
8
Power switch
Document width guides
USB memory port
Paper level indicator
Optional tray 2
1
2
3
12
13
14
DADFa
Network port
Power receptacle
External device interface
(EDI)b
15-pin optional tray
connection
Control panel
3
4
5
6
9
Multi-purpose tray paper
width guides
Output support
4
15
Telephone line socketa
10 Control board cover
11 Rear cover
Front cover
Toner cartridge
Paper transfer belt
Scanner lid
5
6
7
8
16
17
18
19
Extension telephone socket
(EXT)a
Front cover handle
Multi-purpose tray handle
Multi-purpose tray
Handle
12 Cable organizer
Scanner lock switch
a.CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only.
b.External device interface for Samsung and third party solutions. (CLX-
6240FX only).
Introduction_ 19
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only
Selects the document type for the current copy
Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax
Original Type
ID Copy
17
18
Speed buttons
Shift
numbers and enter them with the touch of a few
buttons.
1
2
3
You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a
driver’s license to a single side of paper. See
page 40.
Allows you to shift the speed buttons to access
numbers 16 through 30.
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers
in memory or search for stored fax numbers or
email addresses.
Address Book
Reduce/Enlarge Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original.
19
20
Allows you to print documents on both sides of
the paper.
Duplex
Adjusts the document resolution for the current
fax job.
Resolution
4
5
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB
In ready mode, redials the last number, or in Edit
mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
Memory device when it is inserted into the USB
Redial/Pause
USB Print
21
memory port on the front of your machine. See
page 59.
Fax
Activates Fax mode.
Activates Copy mode.
Activates Scan mode.
6
7
8
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric
Number keypad
22
23
characters. See page 30.
Copy
On Hook Dial
Stop/Clear
Engages the telephone line.
Scan/Email
Stops an operation at any time. In ready mode,
clears/cancels the copy options, such as the
darkness, the document type setting, the copy
size, and the number of copies.
Shows the current status and prompts during an
operation.
Display
9
24
The toner colors shown below the LCD display
co-works with the display messages. See Status
LED with the toner cartridge messages on page
22.
Toner colors
10
Color Start
Black Start
Starts a job in Color mode.
25
26
Starts a job in Black and White mode.
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the
available menus.
Menu (
)
11
12
•
•
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the
surface, and do not allow children near it.
Scroll through the options available in the
selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
Left/right arrow
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
13
14
15
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
Shows the status of your machine. See page 22.
Back (
Status
)
Adjusts the document brightness for the current
Darkness
16
20 _Introduction
CLX-6200ND only
Stops an operation at any time. In ready mode,
clears/cancels the copy options, such as the
resolution, the document type setting, the copy
size, and the number of copies.
Copy
Activates Copy mode.
Activates Scan mode.
1
2
Stop/Clear
18
Scan/Email
Shows the current status and prompts during an
operation.
Display
Color Start
Black Start
Starts a job in Color mode.
3
4
19
20
Starts a job in Black and White mode.
The toner colors shown below the LCD display
co-works with the display messages. See
Status LED with the toner cartridge messages
on page 22.
Toner colors
•
•
All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the
surface, and do not allow children near it.
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the
available menus.
Menu (
)
5
6
Scroll through the options available in the
selected menu, and increase or decrease
values.
Left/right arrow
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
7
8
Back (
Status
)
Shows the status of your machine. See page
9
Adjusts the document brightness for the current
copy job. See page 39.
Darkness
10
11
Selects the document type for the current copy
job. See page 39.
Original Type
ID Copy
You can copy both sides of the ID Card like a
driver’s license to a single side of paper. See
page 40.
12
Reduce/Enlarge Makes a copy smaller or larger than the original.
13
14
Allows you to print documents on both sides of
Duplex
the paper. See page 40.
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB
Memory device when it is inserted into the USB
USB Print
15
memory port on the front of your machine. See
page 59.
Allows you to search for stored email
Address Book
16
17
addresses.
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric
characters.
Number keypad
Introduction_ 21
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
The color of the Status LED indicates the machine's current status.
ACKNOWLEDGING THE STATUS OF THE
TONER CARTRIDGE
The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD
display. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED
turns red and the display shows the message. However the arrow mark
shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new
cartridge.
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Off
•
•
The machine is powered off-line.
The machine is in power save mode. When
data is received, or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.
Example:
Green Blinking
•
•
When the green LED slowly blinks, the
machine is receiving data from the computer.
When the green LED slowly rapidly, the
machine is printing data.
The above example shows the black cartridges status indicated by arrows.
Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve it. See
On
Blinking
•
•
The machine is powered on and can be used.
Red
A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the
display message, and solve the problem
referring to "Understanding display
•
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You
may temporarily increase the printing quality
by redistributing the toner. (See
"Redistributing toner" on page 66.)
On
•
•
A problem has occurred such as a paper jam,
cover is open or no paper in the tray, so that
the machine cannot continue the job. Check
the message on the display, and refer to
"Understanding display messages" on
page 78 to solve the problem.
A toner cartridge has almost reached its
estimated cartridge life. It is recommended to
replace the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing
the toner cartridge" on page 67.)
Always check the message on the display to solve the problem. The
instruction in the Troubleshooting section will guide you to operate the
machine properly. See "Understanding display messages" on page 78
for more information.
22 _Introduction
MENU OVERVIEW
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu ( ).
Refer to the following diagram.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
.
Fax Feature
Darkness
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Fax Setup
Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Send Report
Image TCR
Dial Mode
Fax Setup
(Continued)
Copy Feature
Copy Setup
Scan Size
Change Default
Copies
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Scan Feature
Scan Feature
(Continued)
Stamp RCV Name Copy Collation
USB Memory
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
E-mail
FTP
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
SMB
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
RCV Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Duplex Print
Change Default
Resolution
2-Up
4-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Adjust Bkgd.
Book Copy.
Margin Shift
Edge Erase
Gray Enhance
Scan Size
Receiving
Receive Mode
Ring to Answer
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Darkness
Auto Report
Scan Setup
System Setup
System Setup
(Continued)
Network
System Setup
(Continued)
Change Default
USB Memory
E-mail
FTP
SMB
Machine Setup
Machine ID
Report
All Report
TCP/IP
Ethernet Speed
Wireless
Clear Setting
Network Info
Clear Setting
All Settings
Fax Setup
Machine Fax No.
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Form Menu
Select Form
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Scan PWR Save
Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude Adj.
Auto Continue
Net Accounting
Import Setting
Export Setting
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Source
Sound/Volume
Key Sound
Configuration
Supplies Info
Address Book
Send Report
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
Schedule Jobs
JunkFax Report
Network Info.
NetScan Report
User Auth List
PCL Font List
PS3 Font List
Stored Job
Copy Setup
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network Setup
Address Book
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
NetScan Report
Job Manage
Active Job
Store Job
File Policy
ImageOverwrite
Immediate
Send Report
Completed Job
Net Auth Log
Maintenance
Supplies Life
Color
On Demand
Serial Number
Alarm Sound
Speaker
Ringer
Introduction_ 23
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES
You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD
after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer. CD
provides you with the following software.
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
•
•
Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection
Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers:
CD
CONTENTS
Printer
software CD
Windows
•
•
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your printer’s features.
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)
file: Use the PostScript driver to print
documents with complex fonts and
graphics in the PS language.
Printer driver
FEATURE
Color mode
WINDOWS
LINUX
MACINTOSH
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
•
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows
Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are
available for scanning documents on
your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to
monitor the machine’s status and alerts
you when an error occurs during printing.
SmarThru Officea: This is the
accompanying Windows-based software
for your multifunctional machine.
Direct Printing Utility: This program
allows you to print PDF files directly.
SetIP: Use this program to set your
machine’s TCP/IP addresses.
Machine quality option
Poster printing
X
•
•
Multiple pages per sheet
(N-up)
O (2, 4)
O
Oa
O
Fit to page printing
Scale printing
O
X
O
O
X
X
•
•
Different source for first
page
O
Watermark
Overlay
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
Linux
•
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)
file: Use this file to run your machine
from a Linux computer and print
documents.
SANE: Use this driver to scan
documents.
Smart Panel: This program allows you
to monitor the machine’s status and
alerts you when an error occurs during
printing.
Duplex
•
•
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.
PostScript driver
FEATURE
Color mode
WINDOWS
LINUX
MACINTOSH
Macintosh
•
•
Printer driver: Use this driver to take
full advantage of your printer’s
features.
Postscript Printer Description (PPD)
file: Use this file to run your machine
from a Macintosh computer and print
documents.
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is
available for scanning documents on
your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you
to monitor the machine’s status and
alerts you when an error occurs during
printing.
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Machine quality option
Poster printing
X
Multiple pages per sheet
(N-up)
O
O (2, 4)
O
•
•
Oa
O
Fit to page printing
Scale printing
O
X
O
X
X
X
Different source for first
page
O
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image
editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, refer to
the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
Watermark
Overlay
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
Duplex
a.This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.
24 _Introduction
getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3. Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
6. Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on.
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in
the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and
complete following steps.
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner,
which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.
PRINTING A DEMO PAGE
Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly.
To print a demo page:
In ready mode, press and hold the OK button for about 2 seconds.
SETTING UP THE NETWORK
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings through the
machine's control panel.
Supported operating environments
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:
ITEM
REQUIREMENTS
Network interface
•
•
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
IEEE 802.11 b/g Wireless LAN
(optional)
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See "Altitude adjustment" on
page 28 for more information.
Network operating system
Network protocols
•
•
•
Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.
•
•
•
•
•
TCP/IP on Windows
IPP
SNMP
DHCP
BOOTP
If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://
developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the
Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating
system and install the program. This program will allow you to set
network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the
installation window. This program does not support Linux.
Getting started_ 25
Starting the program
1. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Configuring network protocol via the machine
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.
Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.
1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45
Ethernet cable.
2. Select the name of your printer and click
.
2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.
If you cannot find your printer name, click
to refresh the list.
3. Press Menu ( ) on the control panel, until you see Network on the
bottom line of the display.
3. Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
4. Press OK to access the menu.
5. Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP displays.
6. Press OK.
7. Press the left/right arrow until Static displays.
8. Press OK.
default gateway, and then click Apply.
If you do not know the network card's MAC address, print the
machine's network information report. (See "Printing reports" on
4. Click OK to confirm the settings.
5. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
9. Press the left/right arrow until IP Address displays.
10. Press OK.
Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and press the
left/right arrow to move between bytes.
Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
11. When you have finished, press OK.
Repeat steps 9 and 10 to configure the other TCP/IP parameters:
subnet mask and gateway address.
Windows
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
OPERATING
You can also set up the network settings through the network
administration programs.
FREE HDD
SPACE
SYSTEM
Windows 2000
Windows XP
CPU
RAM
•
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate
internet access. Download this program from http://
Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz) (128 MB)
64 MB
600 MB
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows Server Pentium III 933 MHz
2003
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
•
•
SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your
network print server, which allows you to:
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
- Customize machine settings.
Windows Vista
Pentium IV 3 GHz
512 MB
(1024 MB)
15 GB
Windows Server Pentium IV 1 GHz
2008 (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
10 GB
SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface and
manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
Using the SetIP program
•
•
Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is
the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.
Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at
the same time.
Macintosh
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
Installing the program
1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver
CD runs automatically, close the window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-
ROM drive.)
3. Double click Application > SetIP.
4. Open the folder of the language you plan to use.
5. Double click Setup.exe to install this program.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
FREE HDD
SPACE
CPU
RAM
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4
•
•
Intel Processor
Power PC G4 /
G5
•
•
128 MB for a
Power-PC based
Mac (512 MB).
512 MB for an
Intel-based Mac
(1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5
•
•
Intel Processor 512 MB (1 GB)
867 MHz or
1 GB
faster Power
PC G4 /G5
26 _Getting started
4. Click Next.
Linux
ITEM
REQUIREMENTS
Operating system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)
512 MB (1024 MB)
RAM
•
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
Free HDD space
1 GB (2GB)
5. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.
•
•
It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for
working with large scanned images.
The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at
maximum.
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
•
The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as
a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB
cable, refer to Software section.
•
The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating
system. The procedure and popup window which appear during
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the
printer feature, or the interface in use.
6. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer
you want to install from the list and then click Next.
1. Connect the network cable to your machine.
"Setting up the network" on page 25.) All applications should be closed
on your computer before beginning installation.
3. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive
and click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run Setup.exe
in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the User Account
Control window.
•
•
If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP
address for the machine.
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page. (See "Printing reports" on page 62.)
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer
Getting started_ 27
by clicking the Browse button.
MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing
7. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a
test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in
order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the
corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the
machine.
1 Normal
2 High 1
3 High 2
4 High 3
•
•
If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided
During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer
detects the location information for your operating system and
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to
change the paper size after installation is complete.
Printer Software CD.
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux).
You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X.
3. Click Printer Setting.
4. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value from
the dropdown list, and then click Apply.
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru Web
Service screen appears automatically. Click Machine Settings >
Setup (or Machine Setup) > Altitude adj.. Select the appropriate
altitude value, and then click Apply.
Changing the display language
To change the language that appears on the control panel, follow these
steps:
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Language appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the language you want appears and press
OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
28 _Getting started
Setting the date and time
The current date and time are shown on the display when your machine is
on and ready to work. For the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX, all
of your faxes will have the date and time printed on them.
Setting sounds
You can control the following sounds:
•
Key Sound: Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to On, a
tone sounds each time a key is pressed.
•
Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to
On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication
ends.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
•
•
Speaker (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only): Turns on or
off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a
dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means
“Common,” the speaker is on until the remote machine answers.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Date & Time appears and press OK.
4. Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.
Month = 01 to 12
Day = 01 to 31
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial.
Year = requires four digits
Hour = 01 to 12 (12-hour mode)
00 to 23 (24-hour mode)
Ringer (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only): Adjusts the
ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select Off, Low, Mid, and
High.
Minute = 00 to 59
The date format may differ from country to country
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Sound/Volume appears and press
You can also use the left/right arrow to move the cursor under the
digit you want to correct and enter a new number.
5. To select AM or PM for 12-hour format, press the *or # button or any
number button.
OK.
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator, pressing the *or #
button immediately moves the cursor to the indicator.
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g. 01:00 PM as
13:00). For details, see the next section.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the sound option you want appears
and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status or volume for the
sound you have selected appears and press OK.
5. If necessary, repeat steps 3 through 5 to set other sounds.
6. Press OK to save the time and date.
When you enter a wrong number, Out of Range appears and the
machine does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, simply
reenter the correct number.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Speaker volume
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
1. Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.
2. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.
3. Press Stop/Clear to save the change and return to ready mode.
Changing the clock mode
You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12-hour
or 24-hour format.
You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is
connected.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the other mode and press OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Entering characters using the number keypad
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.
For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or
email addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
Entering alphanumeric characters
1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled
with the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter
appears on the display.
Changing the default mode
Your machine is preset to Fax mode. You can switch this default mode
between Fax mode and Copy mode. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-
6240FX only)
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O,
m, n, o and finally 6.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign, and etc.
For details, see the below section.
2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the default mode you want appears and
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by
pressing the right left/right arrow button and then press the button
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and
the next letter will appear on the display.
press OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.
Getting started_ 29
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
Keypad letters and numbers
the display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Scan PWR Save appears and press
KEY
1
ASSIGNED NUMBERS, LETTERS, OR CHARACTERS
OK.
1
Space
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and
press OK.
2
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
C
F
I
a
d
g
j
b
e
h
c
f
2
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
3
3
Setting print job timeout
4
i
4
You can set the amount of time a single print job is active before it must
print.The machine handles incoming data as a single job if it comes in within
the specified time. When an error occurs while processing data from the
computer and the data flow stops, the machine waits the specified time and
then cancels printing if data flow does not resume.
5
L
k
l
5
6
M
P
T
O
m
n
o
6
r
7
R
V
Y
,
S
p
q
s
7
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Job Timeout appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and
8
t
u
v
/
8
9
W
X
Z
w
x
y
z
9
0
+
-
.
‘
*
#
&
@
0
press OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Correcting numbers or names
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left
left/right arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the
correct number or character.
Auto continue
This is the option to set the machine to continue printing or not, in case the
paper size you have set and the paper within the tray mismatches.
Inserting a pause
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Continue appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for
example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must
insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while
you are setting up speed buttons or speed dial numbers.
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while
entering the telephone number. A - appears on the display at the
corresponding location.
•
On: Automatically prints after set time passes, when the paper size
mismatches the tray paper size.
•
Off: Waits until you press Black Start or Color Start on the control
panel, when the paper size mismatches the tray paper size.
Using the save modes
Power Save mode
5. Press OK to save your selection.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power consumption
when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode on and select a
length of time for which the machine waits after a job is printed before it
switches to a reduced power state.
Net accounting
Net Accounting function limits the number of use for fax, printer, copy and
scan. First, user need to install Net account Plug-in from SyncThru™ Web
Admin Service. Create user account by entering user ID and Password in
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK.
If you are not registered, request Administrator for a registration. (See page
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears and
26)
press OK.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Net Accounting appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
Scan Power Save mode
Scan Power Save mode allows you to save power by turning off the
scan lamp. The scan lamp under the scanner glass automatically turns
off when it is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and extend
the life of the lamp. The lamp automatically wakes up after some warm-
up time when you start scanning.
You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits after a scan
job is completed before it switches to the power save mode.
OK.
•
Protect: Select the option for which you want to enable or disable
Net Accounting.
•
Chg.Password: The access password code can be changed.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
30 _Getting started
Changing the font setting
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided
software CD.
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
3. Click Printer Setting.
4. Click Emulation.
5. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting.
6. Click Setting.
7. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.
8. Click Apply.
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding
languages.
•
•
•
•
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
•
OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B
Getting started_ 31
loading originals and print media
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the
LOADING ORIGINALS
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
You can use the scanner glass or DADF (or ADF) to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX has the DADF function
which can let you scan on both sides of the original media at once.
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF (or ADF). If an original is
detected in the DADF (or ADF), the machine gives it priority over the original
on the scanner glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or
gray-scaled images, use the scanner glass.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.
3. Close the scanner lid.
•
•
•
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality
and toner consumption.
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.
Always keep it clean.
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with
the lid open.
In the DADF (or ADF)
Using the DADF (or ADF), you can load up to 50 sheets of paper (75 g/m2,
20 lb bond) for one job.
When you use the DADF (or ADF):
•
•
•
In the ADF: Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x
5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
In the DADF: Do not load paper smaller than 148 x 148 mm (5.8 x
5.8 inches) or larger than 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- coated paper
- onion skin or thin paper
- wrinkled or creased paper
- curled or rolled paper
- torn paper
•
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely
dry before loading.
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
32 _Loading originals and print media
•
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having
other unusual characteristics.
SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines
for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
•
•
•
Poor print quality
Increased paper jams
Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
2. Load the original face up into the DADF (or ADF). Make sure that the
bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the
document input tray.
•
•
•
•
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described later in this section.
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
•
•
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which Samsung has no control.
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
3. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
Dust on the DADF (or ADF) glass may cause black lines on the
printout. Always keep it clean.
Loading originals and print media_ 33
Specifications on print media
WEIGHTA
CAPACITYB
TYPE
Plain paper
SIZE
DIMENSIONS
Letter
Legal
US Folio
A4
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
•
•
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb
bond) for the tray
•
•
•
250 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) paper for the
tray
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb
bond) for the multi-purpose
tray
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) in the multi-
purpose tray
500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) paper for
optional tray
Oficio
JIS B5
ISO B5
Executive
A5
•
•
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb
bond) for the tray
•
•
150 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) paper for the
tray
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb
bond) for the multi-purpose
tray
Statement
A6
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond) in the multi-
purpose tray
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lb
bond)
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the multi-purpose
tray
Envelope
Envelope Monarch
Envelope 6 3/4
Envelope No. 10
Envelope No. 9
Envelope DL
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.5 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Refer to the Plain paper section
Envelope C5
Envelope C6
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb
bond)
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) paper for the multi-
purpose tray
Labels
Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5,
Statement
90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb
bond)
10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) paper for the multi-
purpose tray
Card stock
Letter, Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5,
Statement
Refer to the Plain paper section
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to43 lb bond)
Minimum size (custom)
Maximum size (custom)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
34 _Loading originals and print media
Media sizes supported in each mode
MEDIA TYPE
GUIDELINES
MODE
Copy mode
SIZE
SOURCE
tray 1
optional tray 2
multi-purpose tray
•
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage
the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s
seams meet.
Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, US Folio,
Executive, JIS B5, A5,
A6
•
•
•
Print mode
All sizes supported by
the machine
•
•
•
tray 1
optional tray 2
multi-purpose tray
•
•
Fax modea
Letter, A4, Legal
•
•
tray 1
optional tray 2
Labels
•
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels
designed for use in laser machines.
- When selecting labels, consider the following
factors:
Duplex printingb
Letter, A4, Legal, US
Folio, Oficio
•
•
•
tray 1
optional tray 2
multi-purpose tray
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be
stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.
Check your machine’s specification to view the
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets
that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,
bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive
material between labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause
damage to machine components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine
more than once. The adhesive backing is designed
for only a single pass through the machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise
damaged.
a.CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only
b.75 to 105 g/m2 (20~28 lb bond) only
Guidelines for special print media
MEDIA TYPE
Envelopes
GUIDELINES
•
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,
consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not
contain air.
•
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
•
•
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are
compatible with the heat and pressure of the
machine during operation.
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and
well creased folds.
•
•
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Card stock or
custom-sized
materials
•
•
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm wide or
356 mm long.
In the software application, set margins at least
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic
materials.
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
•
•
Preprinted
paper
•
Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page 99.
•
•
Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should
not adversely affect printer rollers.
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
•
Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
Loading originals and print media_ 35
5. Place the tray into the machine.
6. Set the paper size from your computer.
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE
PAPER TRAY
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.
•
•
Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the
materials to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper
jams.
1 Tray extend lever
2 Paper length guide
3 Paper width guide
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset to
LOADING PAPER
Letter or A4 size depending on the country.
Loading paper in the tray 1 or optional tray
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain
paper.
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to
load an additional 500 sheets of paper. (See "" on page 91.)
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the
side you want to print facing up.
2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width guide
as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the
side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the
paper; the guide may bend the paper.
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the
tray.
3. Press and hold the green lever on the back of the tray, when you are
1 Full
holding the lever, extend the tray to the corresponding position.
2 Empty
2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See
Software section for PC-printing.
•
•
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a
time in the multi-purpose tray.
You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be
facing down with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print
quality is not guaranteed.
4. Load the paper into the tray.
36 _Loading originals and print media
3. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to
the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be bent,
which will result in a paper jam or skew.
Loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page
printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
•
•
Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print
media.
•
•
•
Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (See "Selecting print media" on page 33.)
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the multi-purpose tray.
1. Hold the handle of multi-purpose tray and pull it down to open.
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following
loading guidelines:
•
•
•
•
•
Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the
top left side.
Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine
first.
Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the
machine.
Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the
machine first.
Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with
an uncurled edge toward the machine.
4. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose
tray. See Software section for PC-printing.
2. Load the paper.
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on
the control panel.
5. After printing, close the multi-purpose tray.
•
•
If you want to load the used paper, place the paper with the
printed side facing down.
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack
to separate the pages before loading.
Loading originals and print media_ 37
ADJUSTING THE OUTPUT SUPPORT
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE
The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. For the output support to correctly align the
pages, you need to pull it out appropriately depending on the paper size.
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and
type using the control panel buttons. These settings will apply to Copy and
Fax modes. For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in
the application program you use on your PC.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press OK when Paper Size appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and
press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper size you are using appears and
press OK.
6. Press Back (
) to return to the upper level.
7. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK.
8. Press the left/right arrow until the paper type you are using appears and
1 Output support
2 Extension
press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
•
•
If the output support is incorrectly adjusted, printed pages may be
mis-aligned or fall.
If you continuously print many pages, the surface of the output tray
may become hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, and
especially keep out of children’s reach.
If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select
Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software
section.
For Letter-sized paper
Pull out the output support to the location indicated LTR as shown, and
unfold the extension.
For A4- or Legal-sized paper
Pull out the output support to the location indicated A4, LGL as shown, and
unfold the extension.
38 _Loading originals and print media
copying
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Darkness
SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY
If you have an original containing faint markings and dark images, you can
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
After loading the print media for copy output, you must select the paper tray
you will use for copy jobs.
To adjust the darkness of copies, press Darkness. Each time you press the
button, the following modes are available:
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
•
•
•
•
•
Lightest: Works well with darker print.
Light: Works well with dark print.
Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.
Dark: Works well with light print.
Darkest: Works well with lighter print or faint pencil markings.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Copy Tray appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and
press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document type for the current copy job.
COPYING
To select the document type, press Original Type. Each time you press the
button, the following modes are available:
1. Press Copy.
Ready to Copy appears on the top line of the display.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.
•
•
•
•
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.
4. If you want to customize the copy settings including copy size, darkness,
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as poster copying,
Reduced or enlarged copy
By using the Reduce/Enlarge button, you can reduce or enlarge the size of
a copied image from 25% to 400% when you copy original documents from
the scanner glass, or from 25% to 100% from the DADF (or ADF).
5. Press Color Start to begin color copying.
Or, press Black Start to begin black and white copying.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge.
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge or the left/right arrow until the size setting
You can cancel the copy job during an operation. Press Stop/Clear,
and the copying will stop.
you want appears and press OK.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate:
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for
each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.
1. Press Reduce/Enlarge.
2. Press Reduce/Enlarge or the left/right arrow until Custom appears
and press OK.
If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all of the
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to
their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress.
3. Enter the scale rate and press OK to save the selection.
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the
bottom of your copy.
Copying_ 39
5. Open the scanner lid and turn the original over.
CHANGING THE SCAN SIZE SETTINGS
If you press Stop/Clear or if no buttons are pressed for
approximately 30 seconds, the machine cancels the copy job and
returns to ready mode.
You can adjust the scan size for the original paper. For example, if you scan
a A4-sized original and set the scan size to A5, the machine scans only the
area of A5 (148 x 210 mm). We recommend you to change the right scan
size for the original paper. This function is only available in CLX-6200ND,
CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX. After loading the print media for copy output,
you need to set the scan size using the control panel buttons.
6. Press Color Start to begin color copying.
Or, press Black Start to begin black and white copying
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not
1. Press Copy.
be printed.
If you press Stop/Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately
30 seconds, the machine cancels the copy job and returns to ready
mode.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Scan Size appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES
You can use the following copy features:
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
After using this option, the machine automatically resumes to the
default setting.
Collation
You can set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2
copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print
followed by a second complete document.
CHANGING THE DEFAULT COPY SETTINGS
The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size, and number
of copies, can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy a
document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed by
using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.
1. Press Copy.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or
place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
1. Press Copy.
3. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.
4. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
5. Press OK when Copy Collation appears.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you
want.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and
press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
There are two types of mode as following:
OK.
•
•
Yes-Color: Color copy
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5, as needed.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
7. Press OK to begin copying.
While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear cancels the
changed settings and restores the defaults.
One complete document will print followed by the second complete
document.
2-up or 4-up copying
Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet
of paper.
ID CARD COPYING
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet of A4-, Letter-, Legal-
, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5-, or A6-sized paper.
1. Press Copy.
When you copy using this feature, the machine prints one side of the
original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half
without reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful for copying a
small-sized item, such as a name card.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or
place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until 2-Up or 4-Up appears
and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you
want.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1
3
2
4
1. Press ID Copy.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Place Front Side and Press[Start] appears on the
There are two types of mode as following:
display.
•
•
Yes-Color: Color copy
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy
4. Press Color Start or Black Start
.
Your machine begins scanning the front side and
shows Place Back Side and Press[Start]
6. Press OK to begin copying.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge button for
making a 2- or 4-up copy.
40 _Copying
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Adjust Bkgd. appears and press OK.
Poster copying
Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3x3). You can
paste the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
•
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
Auto: Optimizes the background.
Enhance Lev. 1~2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the
background is.
1. Press Copy.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
•
Erase Lev. 1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter the
background is.
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Poster Copy appears
6. Press OK to begin copying.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you
want.
Book copying
There are two types of mode as following:
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book. If the book is too
thick, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close
the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with
the cover open.
•
•
Yes-Color: Color copy
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy
6. Press OK to begin copying.
1. Press Copy.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is
scanned and printed one by one in the following order:
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press OK when Book Copy appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you
Clone copying
Your machine can print multiple image copies from the original document on
a single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the
original image and paper size.
want appears.
•
•
•
•
Off: Does not use this feature.
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the book.
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the book.
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of the book.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Press Copy.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you want.
There are two types of mode as following:
•
•
Yes-Color: Color copy
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Clone Copy appears
7. Press OK to begin copying.
and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the color mode you
want.
Margin shift
The Margin Shift feature allows you to create a binding edge for the
document. The image can be adjusted up or down on the page and/or
shifted to the right or left.
There are two types of mode as following:
•
•
Yes-Color: Color copy
Yes-Mono: Black and White copy
The Margin Shift feature can either be used for Scan glass or DADF
(or ADF) depending on the set up.
-Auto Center: Scanner glass
-Custom Margin: Scanner glass, DADF (or ADF)
6. Press OK to begin copying.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge button
while making a clone copy.
1. Press Copy.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place
a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
Adjusting background images
You can set the machine to print an image without its background. This
copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when
copying an original containing color in the background, such as a
newspaper or a catalog.
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press OK when Margin Shift appears.
1. Press Copy.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
want appears.
•
•
Off: This feature is disabled.
Auto Center: Automatically copy in the center of the paper.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
Copying_ 41
•
Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top, bottom margin using
Number keypad.
•
1->2Side Short: Copys pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
When Original Type is set in Photo, CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX,
CLX-6210FX can use this function in DADF(or ADF) but CLX-
6240FX can use this function in both DADF(or ADF) and in
Scanner glass.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select Yes.
7. Press OK to begin copying.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Edge erase
Edge erase allows you to erase sports, drill holes, fold creases and staple
marks along any of the four edges of a document.
The Edge Erase feature can either be used for scan glass or DADF (or
ADF) depending on the set up
.
•
1->2Side Long: Copys pages to be read like a book.
-
-
-
-
Small Original
Hole Punch Scanner glass
Book Center Scanner glass
Border Erase Scanner glass DADF (or ADF)
:
Scanner glass
:
,
DADF (or ADF)
:
:
,
1. Press Copy.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place
a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
When Original Type is set in Photo, CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX,
CLX-6210FX can use this function in DADF(or ADF) but CLX-
6240FX can use this function in both DADF(or ADF) and in
Scanner glass.
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display and press OK.
4. Press OK when Edge Erase appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you
•
•
2 ->1Side: Copys both sides of the originals and prints each of one on
a separate sheet. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
want appears.
•
•
•
•
Off: Does not set the binding option.
Small Original. Erases the edge of the original if it is small.
Hole Punch. Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.
Book Center. Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and
horizontal, when you copy a book.
2 ->2Side: Copys both sides of the original and prints on both sides
of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from
the originals. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
•
Border Erase. Erases the certain amount of the edge of the printout.
6. Press OK to begin copying.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Gray enhance copying
When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better
quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.
1. Press Copy.
•
2 ->1Side ROT2: Copys both sides of the original and prints each one
on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
is rotated 180°. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Menu ( ) until Copy Feature appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
4. Press OK when Gray Enhance appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select On.
6. Press OK to begin copying.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
4. Press OK to save your selection.
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.
PRINTING ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER
By using the Duplex button on your machine, you can set the machine to
SETTING COPY TIMEOUT
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy
settings, if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel.
print documents on both sides of paper.
1. Press Copy.
2. Press Duplex.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
•
Off: Copys in Normal mode.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK.
42 _Copying
4. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears.
Selecting Off means that the machine does not restore the default
settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying, or
Stop/Clear to cancel.
5. Press OK to save your selection.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Copying_ 43
scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SCANNING FROM THE CONTROL PANEL
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced
resolution.
Your machine offers you to scan from the control panel and easily send the
scanned document to connected computer's My Documents folder. In
order to use this function, your machine and computer must be connect by
USB cable or by network.
Also, with the offered Samsung Scan Manager program, scanned
documents can be opened with the program you have setup previously.
Such as Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR can be added to
application program. See "Setting scan information in Samsung Scan
SCANNING BASICS
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the
network.
Scanned images can be saved as BMP, JEPG, TIFF, PDF files.
•
Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the
originals and scan them from the control panel then, the scanned data
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When
the setup installation is completed, then you have installed the
Samsung Scan Manager on your computer already. This feature can
be used via the local connection or the network connection. See next
section.
Setting scan information in Samsung Scan Manager.
You can find out about Samsung Scan Manager program information and
installed scan driver's condition. Also, you can change scan settings and
add or delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are save in
Samsung Scan Manager program.
•
•
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. See the Software section. This feature can be used
via the local connection or the network connection. See Software
section.
Samsung SmarThru Office : This feature is the accompanying
software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or
documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection. See Software section.
Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the Window
and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, See Software
section.
1. Press Start>Control Panel> Samsung Scan Manager.
Samsung Scan Manager Administration appears.
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by pressing the Smart
Panel icon's right in the window task bar.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager.
3. Press Scan Property.
4. Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving destination and scan
settings, add or delete application program and format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using Change Port. (Local or
Network)
•
•
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB
cable. See Software section.
Email: You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.
See page 46.
SMB: You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB
•
•
5. Press OK after setting is done.
Scanning to application programs
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly
connected to each other.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Scan/Email.
Ready to Scan appears on the top line of the display.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to PC appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
44 _Scanning
6. Depending on the port connection, different massages appear. Check
Registering local authorized users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings.
the following messages and move on to the next step.
•
•
•
Scan Destination: Connected by USB. Move to step 7.
ID: Connected by Network and user is registered. Move to step 6.
WLocal PC X: Choosing USB or Network to scan. If connected by
USB, move to step 5. If connected by Network, move to step 6.
3. Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User
Authentication web page.
•
Not Available: Neither connected by USB nor Network. Check the
port connection.
4. Click Add.
5. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the
7. Press the left/right arrow until the port you want appears on the display.
entry, from 1 to 50.
8. Enter the registered user ID and PIN and click OK.
6. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone
number.
You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the
machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel.
7. Click Apply.
•
•
ID is the same ID as the registered ID for Samsung Scan
Manager.
PIN is the 4 digit number registered for Samsung Scan
Manager.
Register authorized network users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
9. From Scan Destination, press the left/right arrow until the application
program you want appears, then press OK.
Go to access the web site of your machine.
Default setting is My Documents.
2. Click Machine Settings.
3. Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or
delete the application program in Samsung Scan Manager>Set
Scan Button.
Authentication web page.
4. Click Apply and OK.
10. To scan from the default setting, press Color Start or Black Start. Press
5. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.
6. Configure the values for each feature, as follows.
7. Click Apply.
the left/right button until the setting you want appears then press OK.
11. Scanning begins.
•
•
•
Scanned image is saved in computer's My Documents> My
Pictures>Samsung folder.
You can use Tawin driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan
Manager program.
You can also scan by pressing Window's Start>Control
Panel> Samsung Scan Manager>Quick Scan.
Network user authenticated by Kerberos
1. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 88.
SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
6. Click Apply.
Network user authorized by SMB
1. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.
2. Select IP Address or Host Name.
3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
Preparing for network scanning
Before using your machine’s network scanning features, you need to
configure the following settings, depending on your scan destination:
•
•
•
•
Register as an authorized user for scanning to email, FTP, or SMB
Set up the SMTP server for scanning to email
Set up the FTP servers for scanning to FTP
5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
6. Click Apply.
Set up the SMB servers for scanning to SMB
User can add up to 6 alternate domains.
User authentication for network scanning
To send an email, FTP, SMB or Network, you must register authorized
local or network users using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Network authorized user by LDAP
•
•
•
If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users
or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data
to the network (email, FTP, SMB, Network).
For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must
register the network or local authentication configuration using the
SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 389.
User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network
authentication, and local authentication.
6. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP
directory tree.
7. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.
Anonymous:This is used to bind with null password and login ID
Scanning_ 45
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
10. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to
permit access to unauthorized persons. It is unchecked by default.
8. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.
11. Enter the login name and password.
9. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
12. Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).
scanned image.
10. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search
13. Click Apply.
results and search timeout.
Setting up an SMB server
To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to
SMB servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup.
3. Click Server List.
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the
LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server
has a referral server.
11. Select Serach Name Order that you desire.
12. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may
check this option if you want to search for information in a default
email address group.
4. Click Add.
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.
13. Click Apply.
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
Setting up an e-mail account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
10. Enter the Share name of the server.
11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit
unauthorized persons to access the SMB server. This box is
unchecked by default.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 25.
12. Enter the login name and password.
13. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
14. Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the
scanned image.
6. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
15. Click Apply.
authentication.
7. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
8. Click Apply.
Scanning to Email
You can scan and send an image as an email attachment. You first need to
set up your email account in SyncThru™ Web Service. See page 46.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3
Before SMTP Authentication.
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page
47.
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
name.
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default
port number is 25.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Scan/Email.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
5. Enter the recipient’s email address and press OK.
If you have set up Address Book, you can use a speed button or a speed email
or group email number to retrieve an address from memory. See page 48.
6. To enter additional addresses, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
Setting up an FTP server
To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP
servers using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup.
3. Click Server List.
step 5.
4. Click Add.
To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to select No and
5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.
press OK.
6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server
7. If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account, press
List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.
the left/right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.
7. Select IP Address or Host Name.
This prompt does not appear if you have activated the Send To
Self option in the email account setup.
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 21.
8. Enter an email subject and press OK.
46 _Scanning
9. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press
OK or Start.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
10. If the machine asks if you want to log off your account, press the left/
right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH SCAN JOB
Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to
customize your scan jobs.
•
•
•
•
•
Scan Size: Sets the image size.
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.
Scanning to an FTP server
You can scan an image and then upload it to an FTP server. You need to
set up parameters for access to FTP servers from SyncThru™ Web
To customize the settings before starting a scan job:
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page 47.
1. Press Scan/Email.
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF) or place a single original
on the scanner glass.
display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Scan/Email.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to FTP appears on the bottom line
OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears
and press OK.
of the display and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.
6. Enter the password and press OK.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the FTP server you want appears and
press OK or Start.
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file type you want appears and press
CHANGING THE DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS
OK or Start.
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up
default scan settings for each scan type.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified
server.
1. Press Scan/Email.
Scanning to an SMB server
You can scan an image and then send it to an SMB server. You need to set
up parameters for access to SMB servers from SyncThru™ Web Service.
See page 46.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press OK
.
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job. See page
47.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears
and press OK.
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF) or place a single original
on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Scan/Email.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings.
8. To change the default settings for other scan types, press Back (
and repeat from step 4.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
)
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to SMB appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
5. Enter the user ID and press OK.
6. Enter the password and press OK.
PRINTING SCAN CONFIRMATION REPORT
AUTOMATICALLY
7. Press the left/right arrow until the SMB server you want appears and
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report showing whether a
transmission was successful, how many pages were sent, and more. The
report shows the job of scanning and sending it via SMB and FTP.
press OK or Start.
8. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press
OK or Start.
1. Press Scan/Email.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the file to the specified
server.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Send Report appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears
and press OK.
•
•
On-Error: Only in case of error occurrence, the machine prints the report.
On: The report is printed whether a job successfully completed or
failed.
•
Off: No report is printed after completing a job.
Scanning_ 47
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
12. Click Add.
Using Address Book entries
To retrieve an email address, use the following ways:
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently
via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email
addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in Address
Book.
Speed email numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an
email, enter the speed email number at which you stored the address
you want.
•
For a one-digit speed email location, press and hold the
corresponding digit button from the number keypad.
For a two- or three-digit speed email location, press the first digit
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.
Registering speed email numbers
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.
3. Click Individual Address Book and Add.
4. Select a location number and enter the user name and e-mail address
•
If you are an CLX-6200FX user, you can also press the speed buttons at
which you stored the address you want.
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address
you want.
5. Click Apply.
Group email numbers
To use a group email entry, you need to search for and select it from
memory.
You can also click Import and obtain your address book from your
computer.
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an
Configuring group email numbers
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go to
access the web site of your machine.
Global email addresses
To use a global email addresses in the LDAP server, you need to search
for and select it from memory.
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an
1. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.
2. Click Group Address Book and Add.
3. Select a group number and enter the group name you want.
4. Select speed email numbers that will be included in the group.
5. Click Apply.
Searching Address Book for an entry
There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either
scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the
name associated with the address.
Retrieving global email addresses from the LDAP
server
You can use not only local addresses stored in your machine's memory but
also ones in the LDAP server. To use the global addresses, configure the
LDAP server first via SyncThru™ Web Service as following:
Searching sequentially through memory
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.
2. Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom
line of the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want
appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when All appears.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access the web site of your machine.
2. Click Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup.
3. Select IP Address or Host Name.
4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 389.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and address you want
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire
memory in alphabetical order.
6. Enter Search Root Directory. The top search level of the LDAP
Searching with a particular first letter
1. If necessary, press Scan/Email.
2. Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom
line of the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want
appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.
directory tree
7. Select Authentication method. Method of LDAP server login.
Anonymous: This is used to bind with NULL password and login ID
(Password and login ID are grayed in SWS).
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
8. Put a check mark of Append Root to Base DN for adding Base DN to
login name.
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press
9. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search results
and search timeout.
OK.
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server in case
LDAP server has no data to reply of query and LDAP server has
any referral server.
10. Select Serach Name Order that you want.
11. Put a check mark of "From:" Field Security Options.
48 _Scanning
Printing Address Book
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the
display.
2. Press OK.
A list showing your speed button settings, and the speed/group email
entries print out.
SCAN ON BOTH SIDES OF PAPER
By using the Duplex button on your machine, you can set the machine to
scan on both sides of paper. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
1. Press Duplex.
2. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.
•
•
•
Off: Scans in Normal mode.
2 Side: Scans both sides of the original.
2 ->1Side ROT2: Scans both sides of the original and prints each one on
a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is
rotated 180°.
3. Press OK to save your selection.
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.
Scanning_ 49
basic printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
•
•
PRINTING A DOCUMENT
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
For details about printing, see the Software section.
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
3. Double-click the Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series icon.
(Or Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS)
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear on the control
panel.
50 _Basic printing
faxing
The fax feature is available only on the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX. This chapter gives you information about using
your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
quality, or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality Fax.
1. Press Resolution.
You cannot use this machine as a fax machine via the internet
phone.
2. Press Resolution or the left/right arrow until the option you want
We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services (PSTN:
public switched telephone network) when connecting telephone lines
to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you
can improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The
Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves
connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not
provided with the machine, contact your Internet Service provider for
use on DSL Micro-filter.
appears.
3. Press OK to save your selection.
Recommended resolution settings for different original document types
are described in the table below:
MODE
Standard
RECOMMENDED FOR:
Originals with normal sized characters.
Fine
Originals containing small characters or thin
lines or originals printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
Super Fine
Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super
Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with
which you are communicating also supports the
Super Fine resolution.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
•
For memory transmission, Super Fine
mode is not available. The resolution
setting is automatically changed to
Fine.
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
SENDING A FAX
•
When your machine is set to Super
Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does
not support Super Fine resolution, the
machine transmits using the highest
resolution mode supported by the other
fax machine.
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on
any fax you send. The Machine ID, containing your telephone number and
name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from
your machine.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
Photo Fax
Originals containing shades of gray or
photographs.
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
3. Press OK when Machine ID appears.
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
4. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You
can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and
include special symbols by pressing the 0 button. For details on how to
enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.
Darkness
You can select the default contrast mode to fax your originals lighter or
darker.
5. Press OK to save the ID.
1. Press Fax.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Fax No. appears and press OK.
7. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
2. Press Menu ( ) , and then OK when Fax Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display.
3. Press OK when Darkness appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change
Adjusting the document settings
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your
original’s status to get the best quality.
Resolution
The default document settings produce good results when using typical
text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor
Faxing_ 51
Sending a fax automatically
Redialing the last number
To redial the number you called last:
1. Press Redial/Pause.
2. When an original is loaded in the DADF (or ADF), the machine
automatically begins to send.
1. Press Fax
.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
Ready to Fax appears on the top line of the display.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No at the Another Page? prompt.
4. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.
5. Press Color Start or Black Start.
Sending faxes on both sides of paper
You can set the machine to send faxes on both sides of paper. (CLX-
6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
6. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK.
1. Press Fax
.
7. When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
After the number is dialed, the machine begins sending the fax when the
receiving fax machine answers.
2. Press Duplex.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the binding option you want appears.
•
•
•
Off: Send faxes in Normal mode.
2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.
2 ->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints
each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side
of the printout is rotated 180°.
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while
sending.
Sending a fax manually
1. Press Fax
.
4. Press OK to save your selection.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
If the mode is enabled, the Duplex button is backlit.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs. See page
RECEIVING A FAX
Selecting the paper tray
4. Press On Hook Dial. You hear a dial tone.
5. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.
After loading the print media for fax output, you have to select the paper tray
you will use for the fax reception.
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.
6. Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high-pitched fax
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK
2. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK
3. Press the left/right arrow until Paper Source appears and press OK
4. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Tray appears and press OK
5. Press the left/right arrow until the paper tray you want appears and
press OK
.
signal from the remote fax machine.
.
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while
sending.
.
.
Confirming a transmission
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message
appears on the display. For a list of error messages and their meanings, see
message and try to send the fax again.
Changing receiving modes
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK
.
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. For further details, see page 56.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK
.
4. Press OK when Receive Mode appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears.
Automatic redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you
send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number every three
minutes, up to seven times according to the factory default settings.
•
In Fax mode, the machine answers an incoming fax call and
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.
•
In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and
then Color Start or Black Start. You can also pick up the handset of
the extension phone and then press the remote receive code. See
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number
without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial
•
•
In Ans/Fax mode, an answering machine attached to your machine
answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the
answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line,
the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.
See page 53.
In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring
52 _Faxing
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables an user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. For further
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to
use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short
ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who
answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
6. Press OK to save your selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
•
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data
stored in the memory.
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the
EXT socket on the back of your machine.
If you do not want other people to view your received documents,
you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode, all of the
received faxes are stored in memory. For further details, see page
53.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax
machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered by the fax
machine. Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be
recognized and answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be
forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into
the EXT socket. You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.
•
•
Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on
your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial
your fax number from outside.
Receiving automatically in Fax mode
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK
4. Press the left/right arrow until DRPD Mode appears and press OK
Waiting Ring appears on the display.
5. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to
place the call from a fax machine.
6. When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
.
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote
machine.
.
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the
reception is completed.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
Press OK when DRPD Mode appears and start over from step 4.
Receiving manually using an extension telephone
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without
going to the fax machine.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
•
•
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or
connect the machine to another telephone line.
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed
to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call
is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine
plugged into the EXT socket.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Receiving automatically in Ans/Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine.
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is
deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
Activating secure receiving mode
1. Press Fax.
•
If you have set your machine to Ans/Fax mode and your
answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is
connected to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into
Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.
2. Press Menu ( ) and then press OK when Fax Feature appears on the
bottom line of the display.
•
•
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
If you are in Tel mode (manual reception) when the answering
machine is connected to your machine, you must switch off the
answering machine, or the outgoing message from the answering
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK
5. Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK
.
.
.
You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a
password, but cannot protect your faxes.
Faxing_ 53
6. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
.
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in
memory.
When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your machine stores it in
memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax
received.
10. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
Printing received faxes
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in
2. Press the left/right arrow until Print appears and press OK
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK
.
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
Sending a delayed fax
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Deactivating secure receiving mode
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 3 in
2. Press the left/right arrow until Off appears and press OK
1. Press Fax
.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See
.
3. Enter the four-digit password and press OK
.
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in
memory.
4. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
page 51.
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK
6. Enter the number of the receiving machine using the number keypad.
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group
Receiving faxes in memory
.
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
7. Press OK to confirm the number. The display asks you to enter another
Also, your machine receives faxes and stores them in its memory when
there is no paper in the tray or no toner in the installed toner cartridge.
fax number to which to send the document.
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.
OTHER WAYS TO FAX
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
9. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
10. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.
11. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK, or Black Start.
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to
multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to
a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased
from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1. Press Fax.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at
that time on the following day.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in
memory.
page 51.
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK
5. Press the left/right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK
6. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK
.
12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK.
.
.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers. You can enter Group
7. Enter the second fax number and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
8. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
Adding pages to a delayed fax
You can add pages to the delayed transmissions previously reserved in
your machine’s memory.
steps 6 and 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.
1. Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Add Page appears.
54 _Faxing
4. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and
press OK.
7. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent
and press OK.
The machine scans the original into memory and shows the total
number of pages and the number of the added pages.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax
machine.
Canceling a delayed fax
Forwarding sent faxes to email address
1. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and
You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a
specified destination, in addition to the email address you entered.
1. Press Fax.
press OK.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
4. Press OK when Yes appears.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.
7. Enter your email address and press OK.
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email
address.
Sending a priority fax
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority fax can be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority
transmission will interrupt a Multiple Send operation between stations (i.e.,
when the transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B
begins) or between redial attempts.
1. Press Fax.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Adjust the document resolution and darkness to suit your fax needs. See
Forwarding received faxes to another fax machine
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to another fax
number during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your
machine, it is stored in memory. Then, the machine dials the fax number
that you have specified and sends the fax.
page 51.
1. Press Fax.
4. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Fax appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.
6. Enter the number of the receiving machine.
You can use speed buttons, speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers.
7. Press OK to confirm the number.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission. The display
shows memory capacity and the number of pages being stored in
memory.
7. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent
and press OK.
9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK.
8. Enter the starting time and press OK.
9. Enter the ending time and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine shows the number being dialed and begins sending the
fax.
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent received faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax
machine.
Forwarding received faxes to email address
You can set your machine to forward incoming faxes to the email
address you entered.
Forwarding faxes
You can forward your incoming and outgoing faxes to another fax machine
or email address.
1. Press Fax.
Forwarding sent faxes to another fax machine
You can set the machine to send copies of all outgoing faxes to a
specified destination, in addition to the fax numbers you entered.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Feature appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Fax appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select On and press OK.
7. Enter your email address and press OK.
8. Enter the email address to which faxes are to be sent and press OK.
Faxing_ 55
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email
address.
OPTION
Dial Mode
DESCRIPTION
This setting may not be available depending on
your country. If you cannot reach this option, your
machine does not support this feature.
FAX SETUP
You can set the dial mode for your machine to
either tone dialling or pulse dialling. If you have a
public telephone system or a private branch
exchnage(PBX) system, you may need to select
Pulse. Contact your local telephone company if
you are not sure which dial mode to use.
If you select Pulse, some phone system features
might not be available. It can also take longer to
dial a fax or phone number.
Changing the fax setup options
Your machine provides you with various user-selectable options for setting
up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences
and needs.
To change the fax setup options:
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the
Receiving options
display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow to select Sending or Receiving and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu item you want appears and
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
press OK.
Receive Mode
You can select the default fax receiving mode. For
details on receiving faxes in each mode, see page
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the
value for the option you have selected, and press OK.
6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Ring to Answer
You can specify the number of times the machine
rings before answering an incoming call.
Sending options
Stamp RCV
Name
This option allows the machine to automatically
print the page number, and the date and time of
reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
Redial Times
You can specify the number of redial attempts. If
Rcv Start Code
Auto Reduction
This code allows you to initiate fax reception from
an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket
on the back of the machine. If you pick up the
extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the
code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.
you enter 0, the machine will not redial.
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
Your machine can automatically redial a remote
fax machine if it was busy. You can set an interval
between attempts.
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as
or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray,
the machine can reduce the size of the original to
fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Turn on this feature if you want to automatically
reduce an incoming page.
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The
original will be divided and printed in actual size
on two or more pages.
You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This
number dials before any automatic dial number is
started. It is useful for accessing a PABX
exchange.
ECM Mode
This mode helps with poor line quality and makes
sure any faxes you send are sent smoothly to any
other ECM-equipped fax machine. Sending a fax
using ECM may take more time.
Send Report
You can set your machine to print a confirmation
report showing whether a transmission was
successful, how many pages were sent, and
more. The available options are On, Off, and On-
Error, which prints only when a transmission is
not successful.
Discard Size
When receiving a fax containing pages as long as
or longer than the paper in your machine, you can
set the machine to discard a specific length from
the end of the received fax. The machine will print
the received fax on one or more sheets of paper,
minus the data that would have been on the
specified discard segment.
When the received fax contains pages larger than
the paper in your machine, and Auto Reduction
has been turned on, the machine will reduce the
fax to fit on the existing paper, and nothing will be
discarded.
Image TCR
This function allows users to know what fax
messages have been sent by showing sent
messages in the transmission report.
The first page of the message is turned into an
image file than is printed on the transmission
report so the users can see what messages have
been sent.
However, you can not use this function when
sending fax without saving the data in the
memory.
56 _Faxing
Setting up Address Book
OPTION
DESCRIPTION
You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most
frequently. Your machine provides you with the following features for setting
up Address Book:
Junk Fax Setup
This setting may not be available depending on
your country. Using this feature, the system will
not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose
numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax
numbers. This feature is useful for blocking any
unwanted faxes.
•
•
Speed buttons
Speed/Group dial numbers
Before beginning to store fax numbers, make sure that your machine
is in Fax mode.
When you turn on this feature, you can access the
following options to set junk fax numbers.
Speed buttons
•
•
Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers.
Delete: Allows you to delete the desired junk
fax number.
The 15 speed buttons on the control panel lets you store frequently-used
fax numbers. You will be able to enter a fax number with the touch of a
button. By utilizing the Shift button, you can store up to 30 numbers on
the speed buttons.
There are two ways to assign numbers to speed buttons. Examine the
procedures below and use the appropriate way which you prefer:
•
Delete All: Allows you to delete all junk fax
numbers.
DRPD Mode
Duplex Print
This mode enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different
telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set the
machine to recognize which ring patterns to
answer. For details about this feature, see page
Registering after pressing a speed button
1. Press Fax.
2. Press one of the speed buttons.
3. Press OK when Yes appears.
4. Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.
5. Enter the fax number you want to store and press OK.
•
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a
book.
•
•
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by
flipping like a note pad.
Off: Prints received fax on one sides of a
paper.
Registering after entering a number first
1. Press Fax.
2. Enter the fax number you want to store.
3. Press one of the speed buttons.
4. Press OK when Yes appears.
Changing the default document settings
The fax options, including resolution and darkness, can be set to the most
frequently used modes. When you send a fax, the default settings are used
if they are not changed by using the corresponding button and menu.
If you press a speed button already assigned, the display asks if
you want to overwrite. Press OK to confirm Yes and continue. To
start over with another speed button, select No.
1. Press Fax.
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.
6. Press OK to confirm the number.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Resolution appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the resolution you want appears and press
Using speed buttons
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax:
OK.
•
•
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 1 to 15, press the
corresponding speed button and press OK.
To retrieve a number from speed buttons 16 to 30, press Shift and
6. Press the left/right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the darkness you want appears and press
then the corresponding speed button, and press OK.
OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Speed dial numbers
You can store up to 240 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial
numbers.
Printing sent fax report automatically
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.
Registering a speed dial number
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.
4. Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 239 and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display
shows the name to allow you to change it. To start over with another
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Fax Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
speed dial number, press Back (
).
5. Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see page 29.
6. Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
Faxing_ 57
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Editing speed dial numbers
Using group dial numbers
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of
To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from
memory.
the display and press OK.
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,
2. Press OK when Speed Dial appears.
3. Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
4. Change the name and press OK.
press Address Book. See below.
Searching Address Book for an entry
5. Change the fax number and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either
scan from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first
letters of the name associated with the number.
Using speed dial numbers
Searching sequentially through the memory
1. If necessary, press Fax.
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a
fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you
want.
of the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want
appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when All appears.
•
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.
•
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address
5. Press the left/right arrow until the name and number you want
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire
memory in alphabetical order.
Group dial numbers
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you
can group these destinations and set them under a group dial number.
You can then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the
destinations within the group. You can set up to 200 (0 through 199)
group dial numbers using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.
Searching with a particular first letter
1. If necessary, press Fax.
2. Press Address Book until Search & Dial appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want
Registering a group dial number
1. Press Fax.
2. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of
appears and press OK
.
4. Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.
5. Enter the first few letters of the name you want and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press
the display and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.
4. Enter a group dial number between 0 and 199 and press OK.
5. Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
OK.
Deleting a Address Book entry
You can delete entries in Address Book one by one.
1. Press Address Book until Delete appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want
appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the searching method you want
appears and press OK.
6. Press OK when speed dial information appears correctly.
7. Press OK when Yes appears.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to include other speed dial numbers into the
group.
9. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
Another No.? prompt and press OK.
10. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all
entries in Address Book.
Editing a group dial number
Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the
name.
You can delete a specific entry from a group or add a new number to the
selected group.
1. Press Address Book until New & Edit appears on the bottom line of
4. Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press
OK.
the display and press OK.
Or, enter the first letters and press OK. Press the left/right arrow until
the name you want appears and press OK.
5. Press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.
3. Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
4. Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
OK.
If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.
If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?
appears.
Printing Address Book
1. You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
5. Press OK to add or delete the number.
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom line of the
6. Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and
display.
repeat steps 4 and 5.
2. Press OK. A list showing your speed button settings, and speed dial
7. When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
and group dial entries prints out.
Another No.? prompt and press OK.
58 _Faxing
using USB flash memory
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the front of your
machine.
ABOUT USB MEMORY
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you
want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:
•
•
•
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.
Print data stored on a USB memory device.
Back up Address Book/ Phone Book entries and the system settings
of your machine. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-
6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
•
•
•
Format the USB memory device.
Check the available memory space.
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.
•
•
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s
misuse.
If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security
settings and password settings, your machine may not
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the
device’s User’s Guide.
SCANNING TO A USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB
memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the
device using the default settings, or you can customize your own scan
settings.
Use only a metal/shielded USB memory device.
Scanning
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Load originals face up into the DADF (or ADF), or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see page 32.
3. Press Scan/Email.
4. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.
5. Press OK, Color Start or Black Start when USB appears.
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as
Your machine begins scanning the original, and then asks if you want to
scan another page.
Using USB flash memory_ 59
6. Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages. Load an original and
press Color Start or Black Start.
3. If you selected a file, skip to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want
appears.
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or
enter the number.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from
the machine.
5. Press OK, Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file.
There are two types of mode as following:
•
•
OK or Color Start: Color print
Black Start: Black and White print
Customizing Scan to USB
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
6. Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to
USB job.
1. Press Scan/Email.
2. Press Menu ( ) until Scan Feature appears on the bottom line of the
Can choose paper size and tray when printing. See "Setting the paper
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when USB Memory appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting option you want appears and
press OK.
You can set the following options:
BACKING UP DATA
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power
failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect your Address Book
entries and the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB
memory device. (CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
•
•
•
•
Scan Size: Sets the image size.
Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.
Backing up data
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
•
Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple
pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in
Scan Color.
machine.
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears.
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can change the default scan settings. For details, see page 47.
•
•
Address Book: Backs up all Address Book entries.
Setup Data: Backs up all system settings.
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE
6. Press OK to begin backing up the data.
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.
Direct Print option supported file types:
•
•
PRN: Samsung PCL 6 compatible.
Restoring data
1. Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be
printed directly from USB memory. See the Software Section to learn
how to create a PRN file.
the USB memory port.
2. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
•
•
•
•
BMP: BMP Uncompressed
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
PDF: PDF 1.4 and below
3. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the data type you want appears and press
OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the file containing the data you want to
restore appears and press OK.
7. Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
To print a document from a USB memory device:
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine. If one has already been inserted, press USB Print
.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.
2. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and
press OK.
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or
folders in the selected folder.
60 _Using USB flash memory
MANAGING USB MEMORY
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or
all at once by reformatting the device.
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot
be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data
before deleting it.
Deleting an image file
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Scan/Email.
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.
5. Press OK when Delete appears.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and
press OK.
If you see D in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about
2 seconds. Go to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want to
delete appears and press OK.
7. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Formatting a USB memory device
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Scan/Email.
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.
4. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Format appears and press OK.
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Viewing the USB memory status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and
saving documents.
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Scan/Email.
3. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK.
The available memory space appears on the display.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to the ready mode.
Using USB flash memory_ 61
maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replacing the toner cartridge
PRINTING REPORTS
REPORT/LIST
DESCRIPTION
Your machine can provide various reports with useful information you will
need. The following reports are available:
NetScan Report
This report shows information for the Network Scan
records including IP address, time and date, the
number of pages scanned, and results. This report is
automatically printed every 50 network scan jobs.
Some reports may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
User Auth List
This list shows authorized users who are allowed to
use the email function.
REPORT/LIST
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
PCL Font List
PS3 Font List
Stored Job
You can print the PCL font list.
You can print the PS3 font list.
This list shows the status of the user-selectable
options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing settings.
This list shows the current status of stored job on
HDD.
Supplies Info
Address Book
This list shows the current status of consumables
in your machine.
Completed Job
Net Auth Log
The Completed Job page shows the list of
completed print jobs. The list contains up to 50 files
from the latest print jobs.
This list shows all of the fax numbers and email
addresses currently stored in the machine’s
memory.
This list shows users and their IDs who logged in
the domain.
Send Report
This report shows the fax number, the number of
pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication
results for a particular fax job.
You can set up your machine to automatically print
a transmission confirmation report after each fax
Printing a report
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Report appears and press OK.
Sent Report
This report shows information on the faxes and
emails you have recently sent.
You can set the machine to automatically print this
report every 50 communications. See page 56.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears
and press OK.
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.
4. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.
Fax RCV Report
Schedule Jobs
Junk Fax Report
This report shows information on the faxes you
have recently received.
The selected information prints out.
ADJUSTING THE COLOR CONTRAST
Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting.
This list shows the documents currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and type
of each operation.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press OK when Maintenance appears.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Color appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the menu you want appears on display
This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk
fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or from
this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu.
See page 56.
and press OK.
•
Network Info.
This list shows information on your machine’s
network connection and configuration.
Custom Color: Allows you to adjust contrast color by color. Default
optimizes color automatically. Manual Adjust allows you to
manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge. Default setting
is recommended for getting best color quality.
•
Auto Color Reg.: Allows you to adjust the position of print color
texts or graphics to match the original file on your screen.
62 _Maintenance
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly recommended to operate
this menu manually.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality
problems occur.
CLEARING MEMORY
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.
•
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blown into the air may
be harmful.
For CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX users, before clearing
the memory, make sure that all fax jobs have been completed, or you
will lose those jobs.
•
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want to clear appears.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen
the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or
into the machine.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or
reduces these problems.
OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION
All Settings
Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets all
of your settings to the factory default.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to
Fax Setup
Restores all of the fax options to the factory default.
cool down.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
Copy Setup
Restores all of the copy options to the factory
default.
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network
Restores all of the scan options to the factory
default.
Restores all of the system options to the factory
default.
Restores all of the network options to the factory
default.
Address Book
Clears all of the fax number and email address
entries stored in memory.
Sent Report
Clears all records of sent faxes and emails.
Clears all records of received faxes.
•
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to
be halted for any reason.
Fax RCV Report
•
•
NetScan Report
Clears the information on network scan sessions in
memory.
4. Press OK when Yes appears.
5. Press OK again to confirm clearing.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to clear another item.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Maintenance_ 63
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the
5. With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the
cartridge from the machine.
toner cartridges area and their cavities.
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your
skin.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
6. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the cartridge compartment,
and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotten black.
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.
4. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.
7. Reinstall all the compartments into the machine, and close the front
cover.
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
8. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on
64 _Maintenance
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
MAINTAINING THE CARTRIDGE
Toner cartridge storage
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF (or ADF) glass until it
is clean and dry.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
•
•
•
Inside the protective bag from the original package
Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)
Do not store consumables in;
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
1 Scanner lid
2 Scanner glass
3 White sheet
4 DADF (or ADF)
glass
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.
Handling instructions
•
•
•
Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of Non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
•
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-
Samsung brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may
vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you
may need to change the cartridge more often.
Maintenance_ 65
2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the
Redistributing toner
cartridge from the machine.
When a toner is low, faded or light areas may appear. It is possible that
colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of
toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner. You
can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner.
•
The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on
the display.
•
The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you
which color cartridge is low on toner.
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your
skin.
•
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of the
toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use the
handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to
be halted for any reason.
•
•
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.
3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side
to side to evenly distribute the toner.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry
cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.
66 _Maintenance
4. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine.
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the
cartridge from the machine.
5. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched.
When you open the front cover, be careful not to touch the
underneath of the control panel (the lower part of the fuser unit). The
temperature of the fuser unit might be high and could damage your
skin.
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each
one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).
•
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicates
which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.
For the CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX, incoming faxes are
saved in memory.
•
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "" on page 91.)
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.
When you open the front cover and work inside the machine, it is
highly recommend that you remove the paper transfer belt first.
Because the work you do could contaminate the paper transfer belt.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.
•
•
Don't use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open
the toner cartridge package. You could damage the surface of
the toner cartridge.
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light
for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to
protect it if necessary.
•
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to
be halted for any reason.
•
•
Maintenance_ 67
5. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side
6. Now the Toner Empty message does not appear but the Replace
Toner message will remain for reminding you that the new cartridge
needs to be installed for quality.
to side to evenly distribute the toner.
•
Once you have selected On, this setting will be permanently
written to the memory of the toner cartridge, and this menu will be
disappeared from the Maintenance menu.
•
You can keep printing but the quality cannot be guaranteed, and
the product support is no longer provided.
6. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, as shown, and remove the
REPLACING THE PAPER TRANSFER BELT
paper covering the toner cartridge by removing the tape.
The life of the paper transfer belt is approximately 50,000 black and color
pages. After the life span of the paper transfer belt is complete, you have to
replace it.
•
The transfer belt-related message appears on the display, telling it is
time for a replacement.
•
The SmartPanel program window appears on the computer telling you
the paper transfer belt needs to be replaced.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
The life span of the paper transfer belt may be affected by operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and media size.
7. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and
then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it
clicks into place.
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
3. Press the green release handle to release the paper transfer belt.
Holding the handle on the paper transfer belt, lift it out of the machine.
8. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched, and then
turn the machine on.
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
Clearing the Toner Empty message
When the Toner Empty message appears you can configure not to see this
message again not to disturb you.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the Scroll buttons until Maintenance appears and press OK.
3. Press the Scroll buttons until CLR Empty Msg. appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the color menu you want appears on
display and press OK.
5. Select On and press OK.
68 _Maintenance
4. Take a new paper transfer belt out of its package.
MAINTENANCE PARTS
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts,
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following
condition, the following items will need to be replaced after the specified
number of pages, or when the life span of each item has expired.
ITEMS
YIELD (AVERAGE)
Approx. 100,000 pages
Approx. 20,000 pages
Approx. 80,000 pages
Approx. 70,000 pages
Fuser unit
•
•
Don't use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to open
the paper transfer belt package. You could damage the
surface of the paper transfer belt.
DADF (or ADF) friction pad
DADF (or ADF) pick-up roller
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
5. Holding the handle on the new paper transfer belt, align it with the slots
Pick-up roller (Multi-purpose tray,
FCFa, Optional tray 2)
on the inside of the front cover.
Friction pad (Multi-purpose tray,
FCF, Optional tray 2)
Approx. 70,000 pages
a. First cassette feeder (Tray1)
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after
their lifespan.
Checking replaceables
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the
corresponding parts, if necessary.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
6. Lower the paper transfer belt until it is parallel with the front cover and
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.
firmly seated.
•
•
•
•
Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF.
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the
scanner glass.
•
Transfer Belt, Fuser, Tray1 Roller, Tray2 Roller, MP Tray
Roller: Displays the number of pages printed each item.
5. If you selected to print a supply information page, press OK to confirm.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
7. Close the front cover firmly.
8. Turn the machine on.
Maintenance_ 69
For the DADF
(CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
1. Open the DADF cover.
Replacing the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad
You will need to replace the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad when there seems to be
a consistent problem with paper pickup or when its specified yield is reached.
2. Remove the DADF rubber pad from the DADF, as shown.
For the ADF
(CLX-6200FX only)
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF
and remove the roller from the slot.
1 DADF rubber
pad
3. Insert a new DADF rubber pad into place.
1 Bushing
4. Close the DADF cover.
2 ADF roller
3. Remove the ADF rubber pad from the ADF, as shown.
MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE
WEBSITE
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s
SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™
Web Service to:
•
•
•
•
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
Change the printer properties.
Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the
machine’s status.
•
Get support for using the machine.
1 ADF rubber pad
4. Insert a new ADF rubber pad into place.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
5. Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right
end of the roller into the right slot. Rotate the bushing on the right
end of the roller toward the document input tray.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
CHECKING THE MACHINE’S SERIAL NUMBER
When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, the
machine’s serial number may be required.
You can check the serial number by taking the following steps:
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK.
4. Check your machine’s serial number.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
6. Close the ADF cover.
70 _Maintenance
troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Solving other problems
3. Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller toward the ADF
(1) and remove the roller from the slot (2). Pull the document gently
to the left and out of the ADF.
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 71.
•
are positioned correctly.
•
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix paper types in a tray.
Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and
•
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the
tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS
When an original jams while passing through the DADF (or ADF),
Document Jam appears on the display.
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its
model.
Input Misfeed
4. Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push the right
end of the ADF roller into the right slot (1). Rotate the bushing on
the right end of the roller toward the document input tray (2).
For the ADF
(CLX-6200FX only)
1. Remove any remaining pages from the ADF.
2. Open the ADF cover.
5. Close the ADF cover. Then load the removed page(s), if any, back
into the ADF.
1 ADF cover
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or
mixed paper-type originals.
Troubleshooting_ 71
For the DADF
Exit misfeed
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF (or ADF).
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the document
(CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.
output tray by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
1 DADF cover
3. Load the removed pages back into the DADF (or ADF).
3. Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF.
Roller misfeed
1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its
model.
4. Close the DADF cover. Then load the removed pages, if any, back
into the DADF.
3. Close the scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back into the DADF
(or ADF).
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or
mixed paper-type originals.
72 _Troubleshooting
2. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below.
CLEARING PAPER JAMS
Go to step 7.
When a paper jam occurs, the warning message appears on the display
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
MESSAGE
MP Tray
LOCATION OF JAM
GO TO
Page 74
In the multi purpose tray
Paper Jam 0
Tray 2
In the optional tray
Page 77
Paper jam 0
Paper Jam 0
Open/Close Door
In the paper feed area or
inside the machine
Page 76
Paper Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Inside the machine
Paper Jam 2
Check Inside
Inside the machine or in
the fuser area
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance
removing the paper, stop pulling, and go to step 3.
Reverse Jam 0
Check Inside
In the fuser area or in the
cover of reverse unit area
•
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material.
Use the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching
this area.
Reverse Jam 1
Check Inside
In the rear cover or in the
cover of reverse unit area
Remove Paper
in Rear Cover
Inside rear cover
•
•
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes,
the OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause
damage to the OPC drum. Close the front cover should the
installation need to be halted for any reason.
Duplex Jam 0
Check Inside
Inside the machine
Page 73
Duplex Jam 1
Open/Close Door
In the paper feed area or
inside the machine
3. Close the front cover.
4. Pull the tray open.
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options
or models.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.
In the paper feed area
If paper is jammed in the paper feed area, follow the next steps to release
the jammed paper.
1. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out as shown
below.
Troubleshooting_ 73
6. To replace the tray, lower the rear edge, align it with the slot, and slide it
5. Pull the paper out gently.
into the machine.
6. Replace the tray.
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 8.
7. Using the handle, completely open the front cover.
7. Open the front cover and close it. The machine will resume printing.
In the multi-purpose tray
When you print using the Multi-purpose Tray and the machine detects that
there is either no paper or that the paper has been improperly loaded, follow
the next steps to release the jammed paper.
1. Check if the paper is stuck in the feeding area, and if so, pull it out gently
and slowly.
8. Remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction shown. To avoid
tearing the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.
2. Close the multi-purpose tray.
3. Pull the tray out.
4. Open the inner cover while you are pushing the lever with two hands.
•
Do not touch the green surface, the OPC drum or the front of
each toner cartridge, with your hands or any other material. Use
the handle on each cartridge in order to avoid touching this area.
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the paper transfer belt.
If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the
OPC drum can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the
OPC drum. Close the front cover should the installation need to
be halted for any reason.
•
•
9. Close the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
74 _Troubleshooting
4. Pull up the paper jam lever to loose the fusing part of the fuser unit and
In the fuser unit area
If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area, follow the next steps to release the
jammed paper.
carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine.
1. Open the scan unit.
5. Press down the paper jam lever to fasten the fusing part.
6. Close the inner cover.
2. Open the inner cover using the handle.
7. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely
closed. Make sure that it is securely latched.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!
3. Open the inner cover using the handle on it and carefully take the
jammed paper out of the machine.
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could
cause burns! The fuser's operating temperature is 180
Take care when removing paper from the machine.
°C (356°F).
Troubleshooting_ 75
If there is any resistance removing the paper or difficulty picking up
jammed paper, stop pulling and turn the release knob to the direction as
shown to remove the misfed paper.
In the paper exit area
If paper is jammed in the paper exit area, follow the next steps to release
the jammed paper.
1. If a long portion of the paper is visible, pull it straight out. Open and close
the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 2.
2. Open the scan unit.
4. Close the cover of reverse unit.
5. Lowering down the scan unit gently and slowly until it is completely
closed. Make sure that it is securely latched.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!
3. Open the cover of reverse unit using the handle on it and carefully take
If the scan unit is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
the jammed paper out of the machine.
If you cannot find the jammed paper, or if there is any resistance
removing the paper, stop pulling and go to step 6.
6. Open the rear cover and carefully take the jammed paper out of the
machine.
76 _Troubleshooting
7. Close the rear cover.
5. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
In the optional tray
If paper is jammed in the optional Tray, follow the next steps to release the
jammed paper.
1. Pull the optional Tray open. After you pull it all the way out, lift up the
front part of the tray slightly to release the tray from the machine.
6. Close the front cover firmly. The machine will resume printing.
If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
2. If you see the jammed paper, remove the paper from the machine by
gently pulling it straight out as shown below.
3. Slide the tray back into the machine.
4. Open the front cover.
Troubleshooting_ 77
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
MESSAGE
Cancel?
MEANING
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s
status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’
meaning and correct the problem if necessary. Messages and their
meanings are listed in alphabetical order.
Your machine’s
memory has become
full while trying to
store an original into
memory.
To cancel the fax job,
press the OK button to
accept Yes.
W Yes X
If you want to send those
pages that have been
successfully stored,
press the OK button to
accept No. You should
send the remaining
pages later, when
•
•
If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
Some messages may not appear in the display depending on
options or models.
•
•
xxx indicates the media type.
yyy indicates the tray.
memory is available.
Connection Error
Connection Failed
Connection with the
SMTP server failed.
Check the server
settings and the network
cable.
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
MESSAGE
MEANING
[COMM. Error]
The machine has a
communication
problem.
Ask the sender to try
again.
The protocol you have Check the protocol or
entered is not
supported or server
port is wrong.
server port.
[Incompatible]
[Line Error]
The machine has
received a fax from
which is registered as
a junk fax.
The received fax data
will be deleted.
Reconfirm junk fax
setup. See page 56
DADF Cover
Open Error
The DADF cover is
not securely latched.
Close the DADF cover
until it locks into place.
Your machine cannot
connect with the
Try again. If the problem
persists, wait an hour or
receiving fax machine so for the line to clear
Data Read Fail
Check USB Mem.
Time expired while
reading data.
Try again.
or has lost contact
because of a problem
with the phone line.
and try again.
Or, turn the ECM mode
on. See page 56.
Data Write Fail
Check USB Mem.
Storing to the USB
memory failed.
Check the available USB
memory space.
Document Jam
The loaded original
has jammed in the
DADF (or ADF).
Clear the jam. See page
[No Answer]
The receiving fax
machine has not
answered after
several redial
attempts.
Try again. Make sure
that the receiving
machine is operational.
Door Open/Check
Transfer Belt
The front cover is not
securely latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
[Stop Pressed]
Stop/Clear has been
pressed during an
operation.
Try again.
Duplex Jam 0
Check Inside
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
This is applicable only
to machines with this
feature.
Clear the jam.
See page 73.
[yyy]
Paper Empty
There is no paper in
the tray.
Load paper in the tray.
Load the correct paper in
Duplex Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
This is applicable only
to machines with this
feature.
Clear the jam.
See page 73.
[yyy]
Paper Mismatch
The paper size
specified in the printer the tray.
properties does not
match the paper you
are loading.
Enter Again
You entered an
unavailable item.
Enter the correct item
again.
[yyy]
Cassette Out
The tray cassette is
not properly closed.
To close the tray, lower
the rear edge, align it
with the slot, and slide it
into the printer.
File Access
Denied
Login to the network
server was
successful. However,
access to the file on
the network server
was denied.
Change the server
settings.
Adjusting...
Registration
The machine is
adjusting the color
registration
Wait a few minutes.
Authentication
Failure
The ID or password
you entered is
incorrect.
Enter the correct ID or
password.
File Format
Not Supported
The selected file
format is not
supported.
Use the correct file
format.
78 _Troubleshooting
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
MESSAGE
MEANING
MESSAGE
Install
MEANING
File Name Exist
The file name you
have entered already
exists.
Enter a different file
name.
The corresponding
Install the part into your
part of the machine is machine.
not installed.
[xxx]
File Name
Over Limit
The file names you
can use are from
doc001 to doc999.
However, all file
names are used
already.
Delete unnecessary
files.
Invalid
[xxx]
The color part of the
machine is not for
your machine.
Install the a Samsung-
genuine part designed
for your machine.
Install Toner
The color toner
cartridge is not
installed.
Install the color toner
cartridge.
T
Fuser Fan
Locked
There is a problem in
the cooling fan of the
machine.
Open and then close the
front cover.
Invalid Toner
The color toner
cartridge you have
Install the a Samsung-
genuine color toner
T
installed is not for your cartridge designed for
Global Address
Not Found
When the device is
unable to locate the
given address of the
Global server.
Check the search ID.
machine.
your machine.
Invalid Server
Address
The server address
you have entered is
invalid.
Enter the correct server
address.
Global Query
Size Exceeded
This is an error
There are too many
message and displays search results. Refine
when the global query your search by entering
IP Conflict
Line Busy
Low Power
The network IP
Check the IP address
and reset it if necessary.
See page 25.
address you have set
is being used by
someone else.
size has been
exceeded.
more letters.
Contact a LDAP server
administrator.
The receiving fax
machine did not
answer or the line is
already engaged.
Try again after a few
minutes.
Global Server
Auth Failed
When there is a
Check the authentication
account and password.
authentication fail
while connecting to
the global server this
message displays.
The machine is in the
previous stage of the
power save mode.
When data is received, it
switches to on-line
automatically.
Global Server
Not Configured
When no global server Check the LDAP server
is configured, this
message displays.
configuration settings.
Mail Exceeds
Server Support
The mail size is larger Divide your mail or
than the supported
reduce the resolution.
Global Server
Not Found
When the device is
unable to find the
Global server.
Check the LDAP server
address, The LDAP
server address is
incorrect, or the server
has failed.
size by SMTP server.
Main Motor
Locked
There is a problem in
the main motor.
Open and then close the
front cover.
The multi-purpose
tray is empty in
manual feed mode.
Load paper in the multi-
purpose tray. See page
Load Manually
Press Start Key
Global Server
Query Timeout
Network Information
Center (NIC) failed to
get the proper
Check the LDAP server
setting, LDAP server
setting is incorrect.
response from the
LDAP server within
specified time.
Memory Full
The memory is full.
Delete unnecessary fax
jobs and retransmit after
more memory becomes
available. Alternatively,
split the transmission
into more than one
operation.
Global Server
Comm Error
This error message
displays when there is
a communication error
between the global
Try again.
Contact a LDAP Server
administrator.
server and the device.
MP Tray
Paper Jam 0
Paper has jammed in
multi-purpose tray.
Clear the jam. See page
Group Not
Available
You have tried to
Use a speed dial number
select a group location or dial a number
number where only a
single location
manually using the
number keypad.
Network Error
There is a problem
with the network.
Contact your network
administrator.
number can be used,
such as when adding
locations for a Multiple
Send operation.
Troubleshooting_ 79
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
MESSAGE
MEANING
MESSAGE
MEANING
Not Assigned
The speed button or
speed dial number
you tried to use has
no number assigned
to it.
Enter the number
Refilled Toner
The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not genuine or refilled. cartridge is installed,
since its characteristics
may significantly differ
from the genuine.
The print quality may get
poor if the refilled toner
manually using the
T
number keypad or store
the number or address.
We recommend
Samsung-genuine color
toner cartridge.
Not Available
Try Again Later
Can not perform the
task immediately
because too many
tasks are running at
once.
Try again when current
task is completed.
Replace Toner
This message
Replace the toner
cartridge with a new one.
See page 66.
appears between
Toner Empty and
Toner Low status.
T
NonSAMSUNG
The color toner
cartridge which the
arrow indicates is not
a Samsung-genuine
cartridge.
Press OK to toggle
the message to Stop
or Continue.
You can select either
Stop or Continue with
the left/right arrow.
If you select Stop by
pressing OK on the
control panel, the
machine stops printing.
If you select Continue,
the machine keeps
printing, but the quality
cannot be guaranteed.
If you do not select any,
the machine will work as
Stop is selected.
Toner
T
Replace
[xxx]
The life of the part
expires totally.
Replace the part with a
new one. Call for
service.
Replace
[xxx] Soon
The life of the part
expires soon.
service.
W Stop X
Retry Redial?
The machine is
waiting for a specified immediately redial, or
time interval to redial
a previously busy
station.
You can press OK to
Stop/Clear to cancel the
redial operation.
Replace the
corresponding toner
cartridge with a
Reverse Jam 0
Check Inside
Paper has jammed in
the paper fuser area
and In the cover of
reverse unit area.
Clear the jam. See page
Samsung-genuine
One Page is
Too Large
Single page data
exceeds the
configured mail size.
Reduce the resolution
and try again.
Reverse Jam 1
Check Inside
Paper has jammed In
the cover of reverse
unit area or in the rear
cover.
Clear the jam. See page
Operation
Not Assigned
You are in the Add
Page/Cancel Job
operation, but there
are no jobs stored.
Check the display to see
if there are any
scheduled jobs.
Scanner locked
The scanner module
is locked
Unlock the scanner and
press Stop/Clear.
Out-Bin Full
The output tray of the
machine is full of
paper.
Remove paper.
Self Diagnostics
Temperature
The engine in your
machine is checking
problems detected.
Wait a few minutes.
Wait a few minutes.
Paper Jam 0
Open/Close Door
Paper has jammed in
tray.
Clear the jam. See page
Self Diagnostics
LSU
The LSU (Laser
Scanning Unit) in your
machine is checking
problems detected.
Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
Paper Jam 1
Open/Close Door
Clear the jam. See page
75.
Send Error
(AUTH)
There is a problem in
SMTP authentication. authentication setting.
Configure the
Special print media
has jammed in the
paper exit area.
Paper Jam 2
Check Inside
Clear the jam. See page
76.
Send Error
(DNS)
There is a problem in
DNS.
Configure the DNS
setting.
Power Failure
Power has turned off
then on and the
The job which you were
trying to do before the
power failure must be
Send Error
(POP3)
There is a problem in
POP3.
Configure the POP3
setting.
machine’s memory
has not been back up. completely re-done.
Send Error
(SMTP)
There is a problem in
SMTP.
Change to the available
server.
Remove Paper
in Rear Cover
Paper has jammed in
the paper rear cover
area.
Clear the jam. See page
76.
80 _Troubleshooting
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
MESSAGE
Send Error
MEANING
MESSAGE
Toner Low
MEANING
There is a problem on Configure your network
Small amount of toner Prepare a new cartridge
the network interface
card.
interface card correctly.
is left in the cartridge.
The estimated
cartridge life of toner
is close.
for replacement. You
may temporarily
(Wrong Config)
T
increase the printing
quality by redistributing
the toner. (See page 66.)
Toner Empty
A toner cartridge has
almost reached its
estimated cartridge
life.
You can choose among
Stop, Continue or
Black Only as shown on
the control panel. If you
select Stop, the printer
stops printing and you
cannot print any more
without changing the
cartridge. If you select
Continue, the printer
keeps printing but the
printing quality cannot
be guaranteed. If you
select Black Only, the
machine prints the data
in black only.
T
Tray 2
Paper jam 0
Paper has jammed In
the paper feed area.
Clear the jam. See page
73.
W Stop X
Samsung
does not
Updating Data
Please Wait...
This message
Do not turn the power off
appears when there is when this message is
recommend
a change in the
system setting or
when you back up a
data.
showing. Changes may
not be saved and datas
can be lost.
using non-
genuine
Samsung
toner cartridge
such as
refilled or
remanufactured.
Samsung cannot
guarantee non-
genuine Samsung
toner cartridge's
quality. Service or
repair required as a
result of using non-
genuine Samsung
toner cartridges will
not be covered under
the machine warranty.
Replace the toner
cartridge for the best
print quality when this
messageappears. Using
a cartridge beyond this
stage can result in
printing quality issues.
See page 67.
If the black toner
cartridge is
empty, Black
Only message
does not appear.
Toner Exhausted
A toner cartridge has
reached its estimated
cartridge life. The
printer stops printing.
Estimated
Replace the toner
cartridge. See page 67.
T
cartridge life
means the
expected or
estimated
toner cartridge
life, which
indicates the
average capacity of
print-outs and is
designed pursuant to
ISO/IEC 19798. (See
Specification on page
99.) The number of
pages may be
affected by operating
environment, printing
interval, media type,
and media size. Some
amount of toner may
remain in the cartridge
even when "Toner
Exhausted" appears
and the printer stops
printing.
Troubleshooting_ 81
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.
Paper feeding
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Paper is jammed
during printing.
Clear the paper jam. See page 71.
Paper sticks
together.
•
Ensure there is not too much paper in the tray.
The tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,
depending on the thickness of your paper.
Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. See page 38.
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the
paper.
•
•
•
Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.
•
•
Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,
clear the paper jam. See page 71.
Paper does not feed
into the machine.
•
•
•
•
Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine. See page 33.
•
If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad may require to
be replaced. See page 69.
The paper keeps
jamming.
•
•
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the multi-purpose tray
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. See page 33.
There may be debris inside the machine. Open
the front cover and remove the debris.
If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF (or ADF) rubber pad may require to
be replaced. See page 69.
.
•
•
Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly.
Ensure the paper guides are against both sides of
the envelopes.
82 _Troubleshooting
Printing problems
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the
complex.
page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
The machine
does not print.
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.
Half the page is
blank.
The page orientation Change the page orientation
setting may be
incorrect.
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The machine is not
selected as the
default printer.
Select Samsung CLX-6200
Series or CLX-6240 Series
as your default printer in your
Windows.
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the
tray.
Or, ensure that the paper
size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.
•
•
•
Check the machine for the following:
The front cover is not closed. Close the cover.
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. See page
73.
•
•
No paper is loaded. Load paper. See page 36.
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the
toner cartridge.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
The printer cable is
loose or defective.
Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed
successfully. If possible,
attach the cable and the
machine to another computer
and try a print job that you
know works. Finally, try a
new printer cable.
•
If a system error occurs, contact your service
representative.
The connection
Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect it.
incomplete.
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.
The wrong printer
Check the application’s
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is
If possible, attach the cable
to another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different printer cable.
driver was selected. printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.
defective.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from
another application.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and then back on again.
attached to the correct one.
Pages print, but
are blank.
The toner cartridge
Redistribute the toner, if
is defective or out of necessary. See page 65.
The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.
Check the printer properties
to ensure that all of the print
settings are correct.
toner.
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that
it does not contain blank
pages.
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Repair the printer software.
See the Software section.
Some parts, such as Contact a service
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error.
the controller or the
board, may be
defective.
representative.
The printer does Incompatibility
Printing the PDF file as an
image may solve this
problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat
printing options.
The document size
is so big that the
hard disk space of
the computer is not
enough to access
the print job.
Get more hard disk space
and print the document
again.
between the PDF
file and the Acrobat
products.
not print PDF file
correctly. Some
parts of
graphics, text, or
illustrations are
missing.
It will take longer to
print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper source
selection in the
printer properties
may be incorrect.
For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Thin Paper tab
within the printer properties.
Select the correct paper
source. See the printer driver
help screen.
The print quality The resolution of the Reduce the photo size. If you
photo is very low.
increase the photo size in the
software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
of photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.
Troubleshooting_ 83
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
CONDITION
Dropouts
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur
randomly on the page:
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
If you are under the
DOS environment,
the font setting for
your machine may
be set incorrectly.
Suggested solutions: Change
the font setting. See
"Changing the font
•
A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
setting" on page 31.
•
The moisture content of the paper is
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its
surface. Try a different brand of paper. See
page 33.
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of
paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
incomplete.
Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor near
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.
•
•
the output tray.
The machine
does not print
special sized
paper such as a
billing paper.
Paper size and
Set the correct paper size in
paper size setting do the Custom in the Paper tab
not match.
in the printer propeties. See
Software section
.
If these steps do not correct the problem,
contact a service representative.
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
problem.
White spots appear on the page:
White Spots
•
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from
the paper falls to the inner devices within
the machine, which means the transfer belt
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your
machine. Contact a service representative.
The paper path may need cleaning.
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears
Contact a service representative.
on the page:
•
The toner supply is low. You may be able
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge
life. See page 66. If this does not improve
the print quality, install a new toner
cartridge.
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The drum inside the toner cartridge has
probably been scratched. Remove the
toner cartridge and install a new one. See
page 66.
•
•
The paper may not meet paper
specifications; for example, the paper is too
moist or too rough. See page 33.
If the entire page is light, the print
resolution setting is too low. Adjust the print
resolution. See the help screen of the
printer driver.
A combination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning.
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,
contact a service representative.
If vertical streaks appear on the page:
•
•
•
The surface of the scanner glass and its
white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.
See 65 . If this problem persists, contact a
service representative.
The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,
contact a service representative.
Color or Black
background
If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
Toner specks
•
The paper may not meet specifications; for
example, the paper is too moist or too
rough. See page 33.
The paper path may need cleaning. See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 63.
•
Change to a lighter weight paper. See
page 33.
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
•
Check the machine’s environment: very dry
(low humidity) or high humidity (higher than
80% RH) conditions can increase the
amount of background shading.
Remove the old toner cartridge and install
a new one. See page 66.
•
•
84 _Troubleshooting
CONDITION
Toner smear
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
Page skew
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine. See page
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. See page
33.
Ensure that the paper or other material is
loaded correctly and the guides are not too
tight or too loose against the paper stack.
63.
Check the paper type and quality. See page
33.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
•
new one. See page 66.
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side
of the page at even intervals:
Curl or wave
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. See page 33.
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
•
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a
repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a
cleaning sheet several times to clean the
cartridge. After the printout, if you still have
the same problems, remove the toner
cartridge and install a new one. See page
66.
•
•
•
Parts of the machine may have toner on
them. If the defects occur on the back of
the page, the problem will likely correct
itself after a few more pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Wrinkles or creases
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. See page
33.
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
•
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
•
•
•
The paper may be too damp. Try printing
with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
If background scatter occurs on an
envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
If background scatter covers the entire
surface area of a printed page, adjust the
print resolution through your software
application or the printer properties.
Back of printouts
are dirty
•
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of
the machine. See page 63.
A
Misformed
characters
•
If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try a different paper. See
page 33.
If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit
may need service. For service, contact a
service representative.
Solid Color or
Black pages
•
•
•
The toner cartridge may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert
it.
The toner cartridge may be defective and
need replacing. Remove the toner cartridge
and install a new one. See page 66.
The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
•
Troubleshooting_ 85
CONDITION
Loose toner
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
•
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine. See page
63.
Check the paper type and quality. See page
33.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
new one. See page 66.
If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appears on copies.
•
•
•
•
If defects are on the original, press
Darkness to lighten the background of your
copies.
If no defects are on the original, clean the
scan unit. See page 65.
Copy image is
skewed.
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF (or
ADF).
Check that the copy paper is loaded
correctly.
Character Voids
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
Blank copies print
out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF (or
ADF).
•
If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
You may be printing on the wrong surface
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it
around.
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
•
Replace the paper in the tray with paper
from a new package.
•
•
A
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
•
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper
in the machine for extended periods of
time.
The paper may not meet paper
specifications. See page 33.
Frequent copy paper
jams occur.
•
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper
guides, if necessary.
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight. 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper is
recommended.
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy
paper remaining in the machine after a
paper jam has been cleared.
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
•
•
•
The toner cartridge may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
new one. See page 66.
If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
•
•
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than expected
before running out of
toner.
•
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,
or heavy lines. For example, your originals
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
The machine may be turned on and off
frequently.
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
•
Turn over the stack of paper in the tray.
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
•
•
•
The scanner lid may be left open while
copies are being made.
An unknown image Your printer is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can
set this option through Printer Settings Utility
or Printer tab in printer driver’s properties. See
page 28.
repetitively appears
on a next few
sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Copying problems
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Copies are too light
or too dark.
Use Darkness to darken or lighten the
background of the copies.
86 _Troubleshooting
Scanning problems
Samsung Scan Manager problems
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The scanner does
not work.
•
•
Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the DADF (or ADF).
There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
I cannot use the
Samsung Scan
Manager.
Check your operating system. Supporting
operating systems are Windows 2000/XP/
Vista.
Fax problems
(CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX only)
•
•
Check that the USB cable is connected
properly.
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Make sure that the USB cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru Configuration or the application
you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
The machine is not
working, there is no
display and the
buttons are not
working.
•
•
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power to the electrical
outlet.
•
No dial tone sounds.
•
•
Check that the phone line is connected
properly.
Check that the phone socket in the wall is
The unit scans very
slowly.
•
Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
working by plugging in another phone.
•
•
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
The numbers stored
in memory do not
dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print a Phone Book list,
referring to page 58.
The original does not
feed into the
machine.
•
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are putting it in correctly. Check that the
original is the right size, not too thick or thin
Make sure that the DADF (or ADF) is firmly
closed.
The ADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. See page 69.
•
•
Message appears on
your computer
screen:
•
There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. When that job is complete, try your
job again.
Faxes are not
received
automatically.
•
•
•
The receiving mode should be set to Fax.
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem.
•
“Device can't be
set to the H/W
mode you want.”
“Port is being used
by another
•
•
•
•
The Selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
The printer cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, Then restart
your computer.
•
The machine does
not send.
•
Make sure that the original is loaded in the
DADF (or ADF) or on the scanner glass.
Sending should show up on the display.
Check the fax machine you are sending to,
to see if it can receive your fax.
program.”
•
•
“Port is Disabled.
“Scanner is busy
receiving or
•
•
printing data.
When the current
job is completed,
try again.”
“Invalid handle.”
“Scanning has
failed.”
•
The USB cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
The incoming fax has
blank spaces or is of
poor-quality.
•
The fax machine sending you the fax may
be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace
the toner cartridge, referring to page 66.
•
•
•
•
•
Some of the words
on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending you the fax had a
temporary document jam.
There are lines on
the originals you
send.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
See page 65.
Troubleshooting_ 87
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
The machine dials a
number, but a
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.
Speak with the other machine operator and
ask her/him to sort out the problem.
When printing a
document in
Macintosh with
Acrobat
Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors
print incorrectly.
The resolution
setting in the
printer driver may
not be matched
with the one in
Acrobat Reader.
Make sure that the resolution
setting in your printer driver
matches the one in Acrobat
Reader.
Faxes do not store in There may not be enough memory space to
memory.
store the fax. If the display shows the Memory
Full message, delete from memory any faxes
you no longer need and then try again to store
the fax.
Common Windows problems
Blank areas appear
at the bottom of each
page or on other
pages, with a small
strip of text at the
top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper
settings in the user option setting. For details
about paper settings, see page 33.
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the StartUp Group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when
several printer languages are being used.
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired
selection next to the PostScript errors section
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred.”messages
appear.
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in ready mode
or after printing has been completed, check the
connection and/or whether an error has
occurred.
POSSIBLE
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
CAUSE
Refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
PostScript file
cannot be
printed.
The PostScript
driver may not be
installed correctly.
•
•
Install the PostScript
driver, referring to
Software section.
Print a configuration page
and verify that the PS
version is available for
printing.
•
If the problem persists,
contact a service
representative.
“Limit Check
Error” message
appears.
The print job was
too complex.
You might need to reduce the
complexity of the page or
install more memory.
A PostScript
error page prints.
The print job may
not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print job is
a PostScript job. Check to
see whether the software
application expected a setup
or PostScript header file to be
sent to the machine.
The optional tray The printer driver
Open the PostScript driver
properties, select the Device
Settings tab, and set the Tray
option of the Installable
has not been
configured to
recognize the
optional tray.
is not selected in
the driver.
Options section to Installed
.
88 _Troubleshooting
Common Linux problems
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Some color images
come out in
unexpected color.
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color
space of the document is indexed RGB color
space and it is converted through CIE color
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color
space for Color Matching System, you should
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least
GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can
find recent Ghostscript versions at
The machine does
not print.
•
Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver configurator
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available printers. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
Check if the printer is started. Open Printers
configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.
After that normal operation of the printer
should be restored. The “stopped” status
might be activated when some problems in
printing occurred. For instance, this could be
an attempt to print document when port is
claimed by a scanning application.
www.ghostscript.com.
•
The machine does
not print whole pages
and its output is half
page printed.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252.
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.
•
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
•
Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or
Gimp home page. For the detail information,
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or
Gimp Front-end application.
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. You should open ports
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,
refer to the Help for application.
configuration and select the port assigned to
your printer. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should
wait for completion of the current job or
should press Release port button, if you are
sure that the present owner is not functioning
properly.
Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter then remove
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command
line parameter in the command item.
I encounter error
“Cannot open port
device file” when
printing a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in
progress. Known versions of CUPS server
break the print job whenever print options are
changed and then try to restart the job from the
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port
while printing, the abrupt termination of the
driver keeps the port locked and therefore
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this
situation occurred, try to release the port.
•
•
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the
socket printing instead of ipp or install later
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
Some color images
come out all black.
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color
space of the document is indexed color space
and it is converted through CIE color space.
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for
Color Matching System, you should upgrade
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find
recent Ghostscript versions at
www.ghostscript.com.
Troubleshooting_ 89
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
•
•
Check if your machine is attached to your
computer. Make sure that it is connected
properly via the USB port and is turned on.
Check if the scanner driver for your machine
is installed in your system. Open Unified
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure
that driver with a name corresponding to
your machine's name is listed in the window.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
The machine does
not scan.
•
•
Check if a document is loaded into the
machine.
Check if your machine is connected to the
computer. Make sure if it is connected properly
if I/O error is reported while scanning.
•
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over
the device. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. This can
usually happen while starting scan procedure,
and appropriate message box will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of the
current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port’s
owner is not functioning properly.
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. This can usually happen while
starting scan procedure, and appropriate
message box appears.
•
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of
the current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port's
owner is not functioning properly.
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
CONDITION
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The printer does not
print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and
the Acrobat products:
Printing the PDF file as an image may
solve this problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when
you print a PDF file as an image.
The document has
printed, but the print job
has not disappeared
from the spooler in Mac
OS 10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or
higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the Cover page
printing.
This problem is caused because Mac OS
cannot create the font during the Cover
page printing. English alphabet and
numbers are displayed normally at the
Cover page.
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Mac OS error messages.
90 _Troubleshooting
ordering supplies and accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
ACCESSORIES
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s
performance and capacity.
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your
country.
ACCESSORY
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
SUPPLIES
Memory module
Extends your
machine’s memory
capacity.
•
•
CLX-6200 Series
When the toner runs out, you can order the following type of toner cartridge
for your machine:
CLP-MEM201: 128 MB
CLP-MEM202: 256 MB
CLX-6240 Series
CLP-MEM101: 128 MB
CLP-MEM102: 256 MB
CLP-MEM103: 512 MB
AVERAGE YIELDA
Average continuous black CLP-K660B (Black)
cartridge yield: 5,500
standard pages (Black)
Average continuous
TYPE
PART NUMBER
High yield
toner cartridge
•
•
CLP-C660B(Cyan)
CLP-M660B (Magenta)
CLP-Y660B (Yellow)
Optional tray 2
If you are
experiencing
CLX-S6240A
colored cartridge yield:
5,000 standard pages
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)
frequent paper
supply problems,
you can attach an
additional 500 sheet
tray. You can print
documents in
Standard yield
toner cartridge
•
•
Average continuous black CLP-K660A (Black)
cartridge yield: 2,500
standard pages (Black)
Average continuous
CLP-C660A (Cyan)
CLP-M660A (Magenta)
CLP-Y660A (Yellow)
various sizes and
types of print
materials.
colored cartridge yield:
2,000 standard pages
(Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)
IEEE 802.11b/g
Allows you to
connect your
machine to a
wireless network and
share it with other
people over the
network.
ML-NWA10L
CLX-HDK410
Wireless LAN carda
CLX-6200ND, CLX-
6210FX, CLX-
Paper transfer
belt
Approx. 50,000
CLP-T660B
When the transfer belt has
worn out with abrasion, you
need to change it. By this
time you may be notified with
the transfer belt-related
message on the display.
6240FX only
Hard Disk
Allows you to
enhance the
machine’s capability
and print in various
ways.
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must
be purchased in the same country where the machine was
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.
a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available.
Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought
your printer.
Your machine may have two memory slots with a factory pre-installed
memory module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory
capacity, you can add a memory module to the vacant memory slot,
according to the table above. It is strongly recommended that you
expand a memory module in vacant memory slot only, without
removing a pre-installed memory module. If your machine has 128 MB
memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB, the memory capacity
expands up to 640 MB.
Ordering supplies and accessories_ 91
HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit
www.samsung.com.supplies and select your country/region to obtain
information on calling for technical support.
92 _Ordering supplies and accessories
installing accessories
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user
may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING
ACCESSORIES
•
Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external
accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
3. Release the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to
When installing accessories, battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself.
the right.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose
used batteries according to the instructions.
UPGRADING A MEMORY MODULE
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory
module slot to install additional memory.
The machine has two memory slots with a factory pre-installed memory
module in one slot. When you are expanding the memory capacity, you can
add a memory module to the vacant memory slot. It is strongly
recommended that you expand a memory module in vacant memory slot
only without removing a pre-installed memory module. If your machine has
128 MB memory capacity and you want to add 512 MB, the memory
capacity expands up to 640 MB. Order information is provided for optional
1 Control board
cover
If you want to remove an existing memory module, push the two
latches at the ends of the module outward.
4. Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.
Installing a memory module
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
Installing accessories_ 93
5. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software
secion.
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
4. Select the Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240
Series PS printer.
5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.
6. For Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista, select Device Settings.
7. Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in the
Installable Options section.
8. Click OK.
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those
on an actual memory module and its slot.
6. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a 'click'.
USING A WIRELESS NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
The CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX and CLX-6240FX is equipped with a
network interface which allows you to use your machine on a network. You
can also purchase a wireless network interface card to enable the use of the
printer in wireless network environments
For order information, see page 91
the wireless network interface card in your machine.
Installing a wireless network interface card
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,
carefully try the previous procedure again.
7. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.
3. Release the screws, then lift up the cover slightly and pull the cover to
the right.
8. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.
9. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.
To release the memory module, pull the two tabs on the sides of
the slot outwards, then the module springs out.
Activating the added memory in the PS printer
properties
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1 Control board
cover
94 _Installing accessories
4. Align the connector on the wireless network interface card with the
connector on the control board. Push the card firmly into the connector
on the control board until it is completely and securely in place.
5. If you selected Search List, press the left/right arrow to select a network
and press OK.
If you selected Custom, set each network options:
•
Edit SSID: Enter the SSID, the name that identifies a wireless
network. SSID is case-sensitive so you need to enter it.
•
Operation Mode: Select the type of wireless connections.
In Ad-Hoc mode, wireless cards communicate directly each other.
In Infrastructure mode, network cards communicate with each other
through an access point, which allows both wireless and cabled
cards to send files to the printer.
In Ad-Hoc mode, even if the network cable is connected, your
printer will use the wireless interface.
•
Channel: This option is available only in the Ad-Hoc mode. In most
cases, you will not need to change this setting. The printer will scan
all available channels for the specified network and will adapt its
channel to the one detected.
1 Connector
2 Wireless network
interface card
6. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
5. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.
Selecting the authentication type
Authentication is a process of identifying the legitimacy of an user to access
a network. You can select whether or not authentication is used.
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Authentication appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow to select the type you want.
•
•
Open System: Authentication is not used.
Shared Key: Authentication is used.
6. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.
7. Press OK to save your selection.
7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
For information about configuring and using the printer on a wireless
network environment, refer to the user’s guide provided with the
wireless network interface card. You can also configure the network
parameters on the control panel; see the next column.
Setting Encryption
If your network uses WEP encryption keys, you can must select the
appropriate encryption type and configure encryption keys. You can
configure up to four keys. The active key must match the key value and key
position (for example, Key 1) configured on other wireless devices in the
network.
Configuring basic network settings
After installing the wireless network card, you must configure the
appropriate network parameters to use your printer in a wireless network.
To do this, you can use both control panel and SyncThru Web Service, an
embedded web site of your printer. This section gives you basic information
on 802.11b/g network parameters which can be configured from the control
panel.
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Security appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Static WEP appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Encryption appears and press OK.
You can configure basic wireless settings, such as SSID, Operation Mode,
and channels. You can retrieve basic settings by selecting a wireless
network or manually configure them as you need.
If you have set the authentication type to Open System, the
Encryption menu does not display.
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.
3. Press OK when WLAN Basic appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow to select the setup method you want and press
6. Set each encryption option and press OK.
•
Encrypt. Type: Select an encryption type: None, 64-bit WEP, or
128-bit WEP.
•
•
•
Key Type: Select the key type of your network.
Using Key: Select the key to be used in your network.
Edit Key: Enter the key number for the selected key position.
OK.
•
•
Search List: The wireless network interface card on your printer
searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.
Custom: You can configure the wireless settings according to your
needs.
Installing accessories_ 95
The numbers you can enter as follows:
3. Open the control board cover. Release the screws, then lift up the cover
slightly and pull the cover to the right.
HEXADECIMAL
ALPHANUMERIC
5 characters
64-bit WEP
10 digits
26 digits
128-bit WEP
13 characters
7. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Restoring default values for wireless networking
If the problem occurrs when you use or set up the wireless network values,
take following stops to restore factory default values. Generally, factory
values of wireless networking are optimized for your printer.
1 control board
cover
1. Press Menu ( ) until Network appears on the bottom line of the
display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.
4. Align the connector on the hard disk with the connector on the control
board. Push the hard disk in until it is latched into place
.
3. Press the left/right arrow until WLAN Default appears and press OK.
4. When Restore appears on the bottom line of the display, press OK.
The machine starts restoring the default values.
USING THE HARD DISK
Installing the hard disk allows the data from your computer to be sent to the
print queue of the printer hard disk. This decreases the workload of the
computer. You can also use various print features, such as storing a job in
the hard disk, proofing a job, and printing private documents.
Installing the hard disk
5. Fasten the screws supplied with your new hard disk.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Release the screws and remove the rear cover.
6. Replace the control board cover and fasten the cover with the screws.
7. Replace the rear cover and fasten the cover with the screw.
96 _Installing accessories
8. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.
9. Print a configuration page from the control panel to check if the hard disk
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit
password.
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.
is correctly installed. See page 62.
Setting the hard disk in the printer properties
After installing the hard disk, you need to select it in the printer properties to
enable its use. Take the following steps:
6. When Print appears, press OK.
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.
Reenter the correct password.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the number of copies you want
appears and press OK.
8. Press OK. Printing starts.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Printers.
3. Select the Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series printer icon
or Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS
printer icon.
Deleting a stored job
You can delete jobs currently stored in the hard disk.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you
want appear and press OK.
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit
password.
4. Right-click on the printer icon and select Properties.
•
Samsung CLX-6200 Series or CLX-6240 Series: Click the Printer
tab and then check Optional Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
•
Samsung CLX-6200 Series PS or Samsung CLX-6240 Series PS:
Click the Device Option or Device Settings tab and set the
Optional Hard Disk Drive (HDD) option to Installedd
5. Click OK.
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.
Printing with the optional hard disk
After installing the optional hard disk, you can use advanced printing
features, such as storing or spooling a print job to the hard disk, proofing a
job, and specifying of printing a private job in the printer properties window.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Delete appears and press OK.
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.
Reenter the correct password.
Once you have stored files in the hard disk, you can easily print or delete
the stored files using the control panel of your printer.
7. When Yes appears, press OK.
Controlling the active job queue
All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the Active Job
Queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.
Storing a job
You can store jobs in the installed hard disk.
1. Open the file you want to store.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window displays.
3. Click Properties. If you see Setup, Print or Options, click the
button instead.
4. Click the Extra tab and click Job Setting.
5. Select the print mode you want from the drop-down list.
• Normal: Prints in normal mode.
To delete a file from the queue:
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you
want appear and press OK.
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit
password.
• Proof: Prints the first file and after a pause prints the next file.
• Confidentical: Stores the files, securing them with a password.
• Store: Stores the file to the hard disk.
• Spool: Spools the file into the hard disk and prints it from the hard
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.
disk queue.
• Delay: Prints the file at a specified time.
6. Enter the user’s name and file name.
7. Click OK until the Print window is displayed.
8. Click OK or Print to start printing.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Cancel appears and press OK.
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.
Reenter the correct password.
Printing a stored job
7. Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.
You can print jobs currently stored in the hard disk.
To promote a file from the queue:
You can select a job waiting in the Active Job Queue and change its
print order so that it can be printed sooner.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Store Job appears and press OK.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.
want appear and press OK.
Installing accessories_ 97
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you
File Policy
want appear and press OK.
You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed
with the job through HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same name
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit
password.
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until File Policy appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and
6. Press the left/right arrow until Promote appears and press OK.
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.
Reenter the correct password.
press OK.
To print a file immediately:
•
•
Rename: If the HDD memory already has the same name when you
enter a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name that
is automatically programmed.
Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job information.
You can print a job scheduled to be printed at a specified time
immediately. In this case, the job currently printing is stopped and the
selected job will be printed. This function is available when the job is
scheduled for later printing.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
5. Press OK.
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Job Manage appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Active Job appears and press OK.
Deleting residual image data
ImageOverwrite is a security measure for customers who are concerned
about unauthorized access and duplication of classified or private
document.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the user’s name and file name you
want appear and press OK.
5. If the select file is a confidential print job, enter the specified 4-digit
password.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until ImageOverwrite appears and press
Press the left/right arrow to enter the first digit and press OK. The
cursor automatically moves to the next digit position. Enter the 2nd,
3rd, and 4th digit in the same way.
OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the job setting you want appears and
6. Press the left/right arrow until Release appears and press OK.
This option appears only when you select a Delay print job. See
page 97.
press OK.
•
•
Immediate: All residual image data from the machine will be erased
immediately after each job has been processed.
On Demand: This option provides an on-demand facility for a
system administrator to erase all the real image data remained in
HDD after this option enabled. All existing jobs will be deleted
regardless of their status and all job submissions will be prohibited
for the duration of the overwrite.
If you enter the incorrect password, Invalid Password appears.
Reenter the correct password.
Printing using the form files
You can store up to 10 form files in the hard disk and make them printed
with your document.
First, you need to create a form file using the printer driver. See the
Software section.
4. Press the left/right arrow to move to On or Off for Immediate.
Press the left/right arrow to move to Enable or Disable for On
Demand.
1. Press Menu ( ) until System Setup appears on the bottom line of
the display and press OK.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Form Menu appears and press OK.
If you selected On Demand enabled, the machine confirms if the
overwrite feature starts now. Press the left/right arrow to select
Yes or No. If you select Yes, On Demand overwrite starts as soon
as you select Yes. If you select No, this feature will be enabled.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the form you want appears and press OK
.
•
•
•
Off: Prints in normal mode.
Single Form: Prints all page using the first form.
Double Form: Prints the front page using the first form and the
5. Press OK.
back page using the second form.
4. Press Back (
) to return to the upper menu level.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Select Form appears and press OK.
6. Press OK when 1st Form appears.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the form file you want appears and
press OK.
If you select Double Form, continue the next step.
8. Press the left/right arrow until 2nd Form appears and press OK.
9. Press the left/right arrow until the form file for the second form
appears and press OK.
98 _Installing accessories
specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.
This chapter include:
•
•
•
•
•
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Less than 49 seconds
The symbol * optional feature depending on machines.
Boot-up time
•
•
Less than 65 seconds (for CLX-6240FX only)
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a lot in
the HDD
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Operating
environment
•
•
Temperature: 15 to 32.5 °C (59 to 90.5 °F)
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH
Up to 50 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
DADF (or ADF)
Capacitya
Display
16 characters x 2 lines
DADF (or ADF)
document size
•
•
DADF Width: 148 to 216 mm/Length: 148 to 356 mm
ADF Width: 142 to 216 mm/Length: 148 to 356 mm
Toner
cartridge life c d
Black
Average continuous black cartridge
yield: 5,500 standard pages
•
•
Tray: 250 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Paper input
capacity
(CLX-6200 Series is shipped with 2,500
pages Starter toner cartridge.)
Multi-purpose tray: 100 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond)
Color
Average continuous colored cartridge
yield: 5,000 standard pages
(CLX-6200 Series shipped with 2,000
pages Starter toner cartridge.)
•
Optional tray: 500 sheets for plain paper, 75 g/m2
(20 lb bond)
(Yellow/
Magenta/
Cyan)
Face down: 170 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Paper output
capacity
Paper transfer
belt
Approx. 50,000 pages (A4, Letter)
Power rating
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your
machine.
Memory
(Expandable)*
•
•
CLX-6200 Series: 128 MB (max. 384 MB)
CLX-6240 Series: 256 MB (max. 768 MB)
External
dimension
(W x D x H)
CLX-6200FX
468 x 498 x 645 mm
(18.4 x 19.6 x 25.4 inches) without
optional tray
Power
consumption
CLX-6200 Series
•
Average operating mode: Less than
580 W
CLX-6200ND, 468 x 498 x 651 mm
CLX-6210FX,
CLX-6240FX
•
•
•
Ready mode: Less than 82 W
Power save mode: Less than 18 W
Power off mode: 0 W
(18.4 x 19.6 x 25.6 inches) without
optional tray
Weight
(Including
consumables)
•
•
•
CLX-6200FX: 35 kg (77.16 lbs)
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX: 36 kg (79.37 lbs)
CLX-6240FX: 37 kg (81.57 lbs)
CLX-6240 Series
•
Average operating mode: Less than
650 W
Ready mode: Less than 82 W
Power save mode: Less than 28 W
Power off mode: 0 W
•
•
•
Package
weight
•
•
Paper: 5.8 Kg (12.7 lbs)
Plastic: 1.8 Kg (3.9 lbs)
Noise Levelb
CLX-6200 Series
CLX-6240 Series
•
•
•
Ready mode: Less than 32 dBA
Printing mode: Less than 53 dBA
Copying mode: Less than 54 dBA
Fusing
temperature
180 °C (356 °F)
a.DADF (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6210FX, CLX-6240FX), ADF (CLX-6200FX)
b.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779
c. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of
pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media
type, and media size.
•
•
•
Ready mode: Less than 32 dBA
Printing mode: Less than 54 dBA
Copying mode: Less than 55 dBA
Default time to 20 Minutes
power save
d.It varies depending on the product configuration.
mode from
ready mode
Specifications_ 99
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Color laser beam printing
Compatibility
TWAIN standard/WIA standard
Color CCD
Printing method
Printing speeda
Scanning method
•
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 20 ppm (A4), 21 ppm
(Letter)
Resolutiona
TWAIN
standard/
WIA
•
•
Optical: Up to 600 x 1,200 dpi
Enhanced: Up to 4,800 x 4,800 dpi
•
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 24 ppm(A4), 25 ppm
(Letter)
standard
Duplex printing
speed
•
•
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 7 ipm (A4/Letter)
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 10 ipm (A4/Letter)
Scan to
USB
100, 200, 300 dpi
First print out
time
•
CLX-6200 Series
Scan to
E-mail
100, 200, 300 dpi
From ready: Less than 25 seconds
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds
CLX-6240 Series
From ready: Less than 19 seconds
From coldboot: Less than 80 seconds
Black &
White
Scan to
PC
75, 150, 200, 300, 600 dpi
•
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb, BMP
Network Scan
File format
•
•
CLX-6200 Series
From ready: Less than 25 seconds
From coldboot: Less than 75 seconds
CLX-6240 Series
Effective
scanning length
•
•
Scanner glass: 289 mm (11.38 inches)
DADF (or ADF): 348 mm (13.7 inches)
Color
From ready: Less than 19 seconds
From coldboot: Less than 80 seconds
Effective
scanning width
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)
Color bit depth
Mono bit depth
•
•
Internal: 36 bit
External: 24 bit
Print resolution
Printer language
Max. 2,400 x 600 dpi effective output
•
CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX :
SPL-C, PostScript 3, PCL6
•
•
1 bit for black & white mode
8 bit for gray scale
•
CLX-6240FX: PostScript 3, PCL6
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might
differ.
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.
OS compatibilityb
Interface
•
•
Windows: 2000/XP/2003/Vista/2008
Linux: RedHat 8.0~9.0, Mandrake 9.2~10.1,
SuSE 8.2~9.2, Fedra Core 1~4
•
Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.3~10.5, Universal Mac
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
•
•
High speed USB 2.0
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (embedded type)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and
job complexity.
Copy Speeda
•
•
CLX-6200 Series: Up to 20 cpm (A4), 21 cpm
(Letter)
CLX-6240 Series: Up to 24 cpm(A4), 25 cpm
(Letter)
Copy
resolution
Text
•
•
DADF (or ADF): Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner glass: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Text/
photo
Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Magazine Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Photo
•
•
DADF (or ADF): Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scanner glass: Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi
Zoom range
•
•
DADF (or ADF): 25% to 100%
Scanner glass: 25% to 400%
a.Copy speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.
100 _Specifications
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS
The fax feature may not be supported depending on machines.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Compatibility
Applicable line
ITU-T G3
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or
behind PABX
Data coding
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
33.6 Kbps
Modem speed
Up to 3 seconds/pagea
Transmission
speed
Maximum
356 mm
document length
Resolution
Color
Black
200 x 200 dpi
•
Standard: Up to 203 x 98 dpi
Fine: Up to 203 x 196 dpi
Super Fine: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
(Receiving only)
•
•
Memory
Halftone
•
•
CLX-6200FX/ CLX-6210FX: 4 MB (Approx. 200
pages)
CLX-6240FX: 500 Jobs (Tx: 100, Rx: 400)
256 levels
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase ”C”
by ITU-T No. 1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.
Specifications_ 101
glossary
DADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user's guide.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
ADF
Default
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
AppleTalk
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.
DNS
BMP
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.
Dot Matrix Printer
BOOTP
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
CCD
DRPD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.
Collation
Duplex
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.
102 _Glossary
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.
ITU-T
Grayscale
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
HDD
JBIG
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer).
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/
IP.
Glossary_ 103
LED
PABX
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
MAC address
PCL
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to
locate machines on large networks.
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page
printers.
PDF
MFP
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
PostScript
MH
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.
MMR
Print Media
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
Modem
PPM
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.
MR
PRN file
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.
Protocol
NetWare
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
PS
See PostScript.
OPC
PSTN
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches
from grits of a paper.
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
Originals
SMB
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-
process communication mechanism.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
104 _Glossary
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.
Glossary_ 105
index
demo page, print 25
jam, clear
A
display language, change 28
accessories
installing
job timeout, set 30
driver
hard disk 96
wireless network interface card
installation 27
K
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection)
key sound 29
Address Book
group dial numbers 58
speed buttons 57
speed dial numbers 57
E
L
edge erase, special copy 42
LED
Address Book, use 48
ADF 19
Linux problems 88
loading originals
F
ADF rubber pad, replace 69
ADF, load 32
fax header, set 51
Fax mode, receiving mode 53
fax number, set 51
faxing
scanner glass 32
adjustment
M
alarm sound 29
default settings, change 57
delayed faxes 54
fax setup 56
forwarding faxes 55
Multiple Send faxes 54
priority faxes 55
machine ID, set 51
Ans/Fax mode, receiving mode 53
Maintenance
maintenance parts 69
toner cartridge 65
C
characters, enter 29
margin shift, special copy 41
memory module
sending faxes 52
cleaning
inside 63
Forwarding 55
installing 93
ordering 91
outside 63
scan unit 65
memory, clear 63
G
clock mode 29
collation, special copy 40
control panel 20
copying
Multiple Sned faxes 54
Group dial numbers, set 58
N
network
H
hard disk
installing 96
use 97
2-up, 4-up 40
book 41
clone 41
setting up 25
network interface card, install 94
collation 40
I
O
default setting, change 40
edge erase 42
ID card copy 40
margin shift 41
original type 39
ID card, special copy 40
installing accessories
originals
jam, clear 71
loading 32
hard disk 96
network interface card 94
time out, set 42
D
J
jam
date and time, set 29
default mode, change 29
delayed fax 54
clearing paper from the tray1 73
tips for avoiding paper jams 71
106_Index
P
S
W
paper
scan power save mode 30
Windows problems 87
changing the size 36
clearing jam 73
loading in the multi-purpose tray 37
loading in the optional tray 36
loading in the tray1 36
scanner glass
cleaning 65
wireless network interface card, install 94
loading documents 32
scanning
default setting, change 47
to email 46
to FTP server 47
to SMB server 47
USB flash memory 59
paper tray, set
paper type
setting 38
secure receiving mode 53
PostScript
problems 87
sending a fax
automatically 52
power save mode 30
setting
print quality problems, solve 83
printing
sounds, set 29
demo page 25
reports 62
speaker sound 29
USB memory 60
speaker volume 29
special copy features 40
speed buttons, set 57
speed dial numbers, set 57
priority fax 55
problem, solve
copying 85
faxing 86
Linux 88
supplies
paper feeding 81
printing quality 83
scanning 86
Windows 87
checking life 69
expected toner cartridge life 65
T
Tel mode, receiving mode 53
R
toner cartridge
replacing 67
receiving a fax
in Ans/Fax mode 53
in DRPD mode 53
in Fax mode 53
in Secure Receiving mode 53
in Tel mode 53
tray
adjusting the width and length 36
U
receiving modes 52
USB flash memory
data backup 60
managing 61
printing 60
redialing
automatically 52
manually 52
scanning 59
replacing
using
ADF rubber pad 69
SetIP 26
replacing components
toner cartridge 66
V
replacing, toner cartridge 67
reports, print 62
volume, adjust
ringer 29
ringer 29
Index_107
contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/
REGION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
COUNTRY/
REGION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
WEB SITE
HONDURAS
800-7919267
www.samsung.com/
ARGENTINE
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
0800-333-3733
1300 362 603
HONG KONG
HUNGARY
3698-4698
€ 0.07/min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
BELGIUM
02 201 2418
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/
INDIA
3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282
INDONESIA
ITALIA
0800-112-8888
BRAZIL
0800-124-421
4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-234-7267
CANADA
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
JAMAICA
www.samsung.com/
CHILE
CHINA
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
JAPAN
0120-327-527
8000-7267
800-810-5858
400-810-5858
010-6475 1880
LATVIA
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
MALAYSIA
MEXICO
8-800-77777
02 261 03 710
1800-88-9999
COLOMBIA
01-8000112112
0-800-507-7267
COSTA RICA
www.samsung.com/
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
CZECH
800-SAMSUNG (800-
REPUBLIC
726786)
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-
7267864) (€ 0,10/min)
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis
Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
NEW ZEALAND
NICARAGUA
786)
DENMARK
ECUADOR
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-10-7267
00-1800-5077267
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
NORWAY
PANAMA
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
800-7267
EL SALVADOR
800-6225
www.samsung.com/
www.samsung.com/
ESTONIA
800-7267
PHILIPPINES
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
KYRGYZSTAN
FINLAND
00-800-500-55-500
30-6227 515
02-5805777
POLAND
022-607-93-33
FRANCE
3260 dites ‘SAMSUNG’ (€
0,15/min)
0 825 08 65 65 (€ 0,15/min)
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO
80820-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
GERMANY
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-
7864 € 0,14/min)
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/
GUATEMALA
1-800-299-0013
www.samsung.com/
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/
108 _Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
COUNTRY/
REGION
CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER
WEB SITE
EIRE
0818 717 100
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55
SINGAPORE
1800-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
SLOVAKIA
0800-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
SPAIN
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
CHF 0.08/min)
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
0800-329-999
THAILAND
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
www.samsung.com/
TURKEY
U.A.E
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726
U.K
0845 SAMSUNG (726-
7864)
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG
(7267864)
UKRAINE
8-800-502-0000
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
0-800-100-5303
1 800 588 889
www.samsung.com/
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 109
© 2008 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Rev. 3.00
Samsung Printer
Software section
SOFTWARE SECTION
CONTENTS
Installing Printer Software ........................................................................................................ 5
Installing Software for Local Printing ................................................................................. 5
Installing Software for Network Printing ............................................................................. 8
Reinstalling Printer Software ................................................................................................... 11
Removing Printer Software ..................................................................................................... 12
Installing mono printer driver .................................................................................................. 12
Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 14
Printing to a file (PRN) .......................................................................................................... 14
Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 15
Layout Tab .................................................................................................................. 15
Paper Tab .................................................................................................................... 16
Graphics Tab ............................................................................................................... 17
Extras Tab ................................................................................................................... 17
About Tab ................................................................................................................... 18
Printer Tab .................................................................................................................. 18
Using a Favorite Setting ................................................................................................ 18
Using Help ................................................................................................................... 18
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) ..................................................... 19
Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................... 20
Printing Booklets .................................................................................................................. 20
Printing on Both Sides of Paper ............................................................................................... 21
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document ................................................................................ 21
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ......................................................................... 21
1
Using Watermarks ................................................................................................................. 22
Using an Existing Watermark ......................................................................................... 22
Creating a Watermark ................................................................................................... 22
Editing a Watermark ..................................................................................................... 22
Deleting a Watermark ................................................................................................... 22
Using Overlays ...................................................................................................................... 23
What is an Overlay? ...................................................................................................... 23
Creating a New Page Overlay ......................................................................................... 23
Using a Page Overlay .................................................................................................... 23
Deleting a Page Overlay ................................................................................................ 23
Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 24
Using Help ................................................................................................................... 24
Overview Direct Printing Utility ................................................................................................ 25
Printing ................................................................................................................................ 25
From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................ 25
Using the shortcut icon ................................................................................................. 25
Using the right-click menu ............................................................................................. 25
Setting Up a Host Computer ................................................................................................... 26
Setting Up a Client Computer .................................................................................................. 26
2
Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office ................................................................................ 27
Using Samsung SmarThru Office .................................................................................... 27
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office ............................................................................ 29
Using Onscreen Help File ............................................................................................... 29
Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ........................................................................ 29
Scanning Using the WIA Driver ................................................................................................ 29
Windows XP ................................................................................................................. 29
Windows Vista ............................................................................................................. 29
Understanding Smart Panel .................................................................................................... 30
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................... 31
Using Printer Settings Utility ................................................................................................... 31
Using Onscreen Help File ............................................................................................... 31
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ............................................................................. 31
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 32
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................ 32
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................... 32
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................... 33
Using SetIP program .............................................................................................................. 34
Starting the program .................................................................................................... 34
Using the Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................... 34
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator .......................................................................... 34
Printers Configuration ................................................................................................... 35
Scanners Configuration ................................................................................................. 36
Ports Configuration ....................................................................................................... 36
Configuring Printer Properties ................................................................................................. 37
Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 37
Printing from Applications .............................................................................................. 37
Printing Files ................................................................................................................ 38
Scanning a Document ............................................................................................................ 38
Using the Image Manager .............................................................................................. 39
3
Installing Software ................................................................................................................ 41
Uninstalling software ............................................................................................................. 41
Using SetIP program .............................................................................................................. 42
Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................................ 42
For a Network-connected Macintosh ................................................................................ 42
For a USB-connected .................................................................................................... 43
Printing ................................................................................................................................ 44
Printing a Document ..................................................................................................... 44
Changing Printer Settings .............................................................................................. 44
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper .................................................................. 46
Duplex Printing ............................................................................................................ 46
Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 47
Scanning with USB ....................................................................................................... 47
Scanning with network .................................................................................................. 47
Setting scan information in Scan Manager. ...................................................................... 47
4
Typical Installation
1
Installing Printer
Software in Windows
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on.
This chapter includes:
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “
letter which represents your drive and click OK
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe
X” with the
.
→
→
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for
other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows
user's guide or online help.
→
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
Installing Printer Software
You can install the printer software for local printing or network
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on
the printer in use.
A printer driver is software that lets your computer
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning
installation.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
Installing Software for Local Printing
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click
Next
.
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a
USB or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network,
skip this step and go to “Installing Software for Network
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom
method.
NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during
the installation procedure, click
in the upper right corner of
the box to close the window, or click Cancel
.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Custom Installation
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
You can choose individual components to install.
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on.
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “
letter which represents your drive and click OK
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe
X” with the
.
→
→
→
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Continue in the User Account Control window.
• After connecting the printer, click Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
3
Click Next.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next
.
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and
click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
Select Custom installation. Click Next
4
.
Otherwise, just click Finish
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows
5
Select your printer and click Next
.
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by
clicking [Browse].
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next
.
8
9
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and
click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click Finish
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click
Next
Installing Software for Network
Printing
.
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to
install the software on each computer on the network.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom
method.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network
and powered on. For details about connecting to the
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
NOTE: If your printer is not connected to the network, the
following window will appear. Select a setup option you want,
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
click Next
.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “
letter which represents your drive and click OK
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe
X” with the
.
→
→
→
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
Then the Set IP Address window appears. Do as follows:
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
1.Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the
list.
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows
2.Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP
address for the network printer.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
3.Click Next, and go to step 6.
You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on
Set IP Address window. Your machine’s embedded
website opens.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install and set a
specific IP address.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network
and powered on. For details about connecting to the
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
printer.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “
letter which represents your drive and click OK
If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs
Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe
X” with the
.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,
print a Network Configuration page in machine.
→
→
→
.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click
Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and
click Continue in the User Account Control window.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please
turn off the firewall and click Update
For Windows operating system, click Start
.
→
Control Panel
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding
checkbox(es) and click Finish
.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows
3
Click Next
.
printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,
print a Network Configuration page in machine.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn
off the firewall and click Update
.
For Windows operating system, click Start
→
Control Panel
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
Select Custom installation. Click Next
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP
Address window appears. Do as follows:
4
.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the
list.
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP
address for the network printer.
click Next
.
c. Click Next
.
You can also set the network printer via SyncThruTM Web
Service, an embedded web server. Click Launch SWS on
Set IP Address window. Your machine’s embedded website
opens.
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the
components, the following window appears. You can also
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
10
Installing Printer Software in Windows
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and
change the port name of each printer. Click Next
.
Reinstalling Printer Software
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.
1
2
Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→
your printer driver name
→
Maintenance.
3
4
Select Repair and click Next
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next
.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up
this printer on a server checkbox.
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding
checkbox(es) and click Finish
.
Otherwise, just click Finish
.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
printer.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any
item individually.
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
11
Installing Printer Software in Windows
• After connecting the printer, click Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
Installing mono printer driver
This printer features a monochrome only printer. This mono
driver limits output to th black toner. You must install the mono
driver on your computer. Following steps guide you through the
step by step installation process.
1
2
3
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on. Or your computer and printer are
connected to the network.
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The
CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click
Next
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing
and you select your printer driver name, the window
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:
Click Cancel.
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click
Next
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes
.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish
.
Removing Printer Software
1
2
Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→
your printer driver name
→
Maintenance.
3
Select Remove and click Next
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any
item individually.
Select the components you want to remove and then click
If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.
4
5
6
7
Click Start
Select Add Printer
When Add Printer Wizard appears, click Next
→
Printers and Faxes.
4
5
.
Next
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,
click Yes
.
.
Select Local printer attached to this computer, and
Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play
printer, then click Next. Go to step 13.
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed
from your computer.
If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the
next step.
After the software is removed, click Finish
.
8
9
Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window.
In the Select a Printer Port window, select Have
Disk...
.
10Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer.
ex) Windows XP 32 bit
Select CD-ROM drive
WINXP_2000_VISTA-32
11Select ***.inf file and click Open.
12Click OK in the Install From Disk window.
→
Printer
→
PC_MONO
→
12
Installing Printer Software in Windows
13Select a mono driver in the Printers field, and click Next.
NOTE: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the
Use Existing Driver window. Select as the window explains,
and click Next. Also, depending on your computer
configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test
page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.
14Enter your printer name, and click Next.
15Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver.
16NOTE: If your printer is connected to a network, go to
printer's Properties and select the Ports tab, then click
Add Portand Standard TCP/IP Port, and create a new
port to connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow
the procedure laid out in the wizard window.
13
Installing Printer Software in Windows
The basic print settings are selected within the Print
window. These settings include the number of copies and
print range.
2
Basic Printing
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing
tasks in Windows.
This chapter includes:
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
3
4
Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down
list.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print
,
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next
screen.
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print
window.
Printing a Document
NOTES
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your
purpose.
To create a file:
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see
an exclamation
mark or
mark. An exclamation mark
means you can select that certain option but it is not
recommended, and
mark means you cannot select that
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps
for printing a document may vary depending on the application
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your
software application for the exact printing procedure.
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your
application.
2
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then
click OK.
14
Basic Printing
Layout Tab
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes
Printer Settings
Multiple Pages per Side
information on accessing printer properties.
,
Poster Printing and Booklet
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need when using your
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can
review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your
NOTES
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in
the software application first, and change any remaining
settings using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are
using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
Paper Orientation
Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which
information is printed on a page.
•
•
Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.
Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet
style.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
•
Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.
Printing Preferences
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
Landscape
Portrait
Layout Options
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.
You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing
.
•
For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
•
•
For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 20
For details, see “Printing Booklets” on page 20
Double-sided Printing
Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does
not have this feature.
•
For details, see “Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 21.
15
Basic Printing
•
•
•
Cotton Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such
as Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.
Archive Paper: When you need to keep print-out for a long
period time such as archives, select this option.
Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your
printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2)
cotton paper.
Paper Tab
Use the following options to set the basic paper handling
specifications when you access the printer properties. See
“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on
accessing printer properties.
Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.
•
•
Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.
Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) color-
backgrounded paper.
First Page
This property allows you to print the first page using a different
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the
paper source for the first page.
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page
option. If this option does not appear, your printer does
not have this feature.
Scaling Printing
Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale
your print job on a page. You can choose from None
,
Reduce/
Enlarge, and Fit to Page
.
•
•
For details, see “Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document” on
For details, see “Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper
Copies
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.
You can select 1 to 999 copies.
Paper Options
Size
Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom
.
When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper
size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can
select it.
Source
Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.
Use Multi-Purpose Tray when printing on special materials like
envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a
time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.
If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer
automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:
Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.
Type
Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality
printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.
•
Thin Paper: Less than 19 lb (70 g/m2) thin paper.
Thick Paper: 24 lb to 32 lb (90~120 g/m2) thick paper.
•
•
Bond Paper When you use the bond paper, select this
:
option.
16
Basic Printing
after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print
correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your
print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful
when printing Adobe. This feature is available only
when you use the PCL 6 printer driver.
Graphics Tab
Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for
your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on
page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties.
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.
-
-
Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the
driver will download the font data as bitmap images.
Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or
Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this
setting.This feature is available only when you use
the PCL 6 printer driver.
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver
will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this
setting. This feature is available only when you use
the PCL 6 printer driver.
•
•
Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To
Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid
black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
Print All Text To Darken: When the Print All Text To
Darken option is checked, all text in your document is allowed
to print darker than on a normal document. (CLX-6200ND,
CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX only).
Quality
• Grayscale Enhancement: Press the Smart Color tab. It
allows users to preserve the details of nature photos, and
improve contrast and readability among gray scaled
colors, when printing color documents in grayscale.
The Quality options you can select may vary depending
on your printer model. The higher the setting, the sharper the
clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also
may increase the time it takes to print a document.
•
Fine Edge: Press the Smart Color tab. It allows users to
emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving
readability and align each color channel registration in color
printing mode. (CLX-6200ND, CLX-6200FX, CLX-6210FX
only).
Color Mode
You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces
the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to
print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you
want to adjust the color options manually, select Manual and
click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button.
Extras Tab
You can select output options for your document. See “Printing
a Document” on page 14 for more information about accessing
the printer properties.
•
Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to
set total number of copies from Paper tab. When you make
several copies, and if you want to print some copies in color and
some in grayscale, use this option and select the number of
copies in grayscale.
Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:
•
•
Color Adjust : You can adjust the appearance of images by
changing the settings in the Levels option.
Color Matching : You can adjust the appearance of images by
changing the settings in the Settings option.
Advanced Options
You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced
Options button.
•
Raster Compression: This option determines the
compression level of images for transferring data from a
computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the
printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6
printer driver.
•
TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver
tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.
Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your
document. This feature is available only when you use
the PCL 6 printer driver.
-
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the
driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your
document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,
Watermark
17
Basic Printing
You can create a background text image to be printed on each
Printer Tab
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,
you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer
configuration.
Overlay
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online
help.
Output Options
1
2
3
4
Click the Windows Start menu.
Select Printers and Faxes
•
Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages
.
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.
Select your printer driver icon.
-
-
-
-
Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first
page to the last page.
Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages
from the last page to the first page.
Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd
numbered pages of the document.
Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Properties
.
5
Click the Printer tab and set the options.
Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even
numbered pages of the document.
Using a Favorite Setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,
allows you to save the current properties settings for future
use.
•
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes
time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts
used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,
however, you use fonts in your document that are very different
from those resident in the printer, your printed output will
appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6
printer driver.
To save a Favorites item:
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
•
Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to
save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once
this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name
and the destination path each time you print. If you want to
preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in
the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL 6
printer driver.
3
Click Save.
When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are
saved.
Job Setting
To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop
down list. The printer is now set to print according to the
Favorites setting you selected.
Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the
printing file by using the optional HDD. Some printers do not
support this feature.
To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click
Delete
.
Using Onscreen Help File
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by
selecting Printer Default from the list.
• For more information about Job Setting, click
at the
top right corner of the window. The Job Setting Help
window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied
Using Help
on the Job Setting
.
Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking
the Help button in the printer properties window. These help
screens give detailed information about the printer features
provided by the printer driver.
About Tab
You can also click
from the upper right corner of the
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.
See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information
about accessing printer properties.
window, and then click on any setting.
18
Basic Printing
3
Advanced Printing
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing
tasks.
Printing Multiple Pages on One
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1
3
2
4
NOTE
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
3
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in
the Layout Type drop-down list.
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down
list.
This chapter includes:
4
Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down
list, if necessary.
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each
page on the sheet.
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and
type.
5
6
Click OK and print the document.
19
Advanced Printing
Printing Posters
Printing Booklets
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
2
3
Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the
Layout Type drop-down list.
Configure the poster option:
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a
You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>
,
Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>. If you select
,
2
From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the
Layout Type drop-down list.
Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched
to cover 4 physical pages.
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for
this feature, select the paper size in the Size option on the
Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout
Type drop-down list on the Layout tab is activated.
3
Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and
type.
Click OK and print the document.
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it
easier to pasting the sheets together.
4
5
0.15 inches
After printing, fold and staple the pages.
0.15 inches
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and
type.
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the
poster by pasting the sheets together.
20
Advanced Printing
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged
Document
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,
decide how you want your document oriented.
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or
smaller on the printed page.
The options are:
•
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control
panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,
your printer does not have this feature.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the
Printing Type drop-down list.
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
•
•
None
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in
book binding.
You can also click the
or
button.
•
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.
2
Click OK and print the document.
2
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
Fitting Your Document to a
Selected Paper Size
▲
Long Edge
▲
Short Edge
•
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option
does not appear, your printer does not have this
feature.
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small
document.
A
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the
printer may result.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
3
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing
Type drop-down list.
Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down
list.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. “Printing a
4
5
Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.
2
3
From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.
Click OK and print the document.
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the
binding option you want.
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and
type.
Click OK and print the document.
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-
screen instructions to complete the printing job.
21
Advanced Printing
Editing a Watermark
Using Watermarks
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window
appears.
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current
Watermarks list and change the watermark message and
options.
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing
document. For example, you may want to have large gray
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally
across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to
the list.
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the
selected watermark in the preview image.
Deleting a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
2
From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window
appears.
Click OK and start printing.
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when
it is printed.
3
4
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermarks list and click Delete
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
.
Creating a Watermark
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the
Watermark section. The Edit Watermark window
appears.
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays
in the preview window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark
prints on the first page only.
4
Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle
of the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.
When you have finished editing, click OK and start
printing.
To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from
the Watermark drop-down list.
22
Advanced Printing
Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with
your document. To print an overlay with a document:
Using Overlays
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.
What is an Overlay?
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need
only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your
document.
Dear ABC
3
4
Click the Extras tab.
Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down
list box.
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the
Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and
select the overlay file.
Regards
WORLD BEST
5
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an
external source, you can also load the file when you access
the Load Overlay window.
Creating a New Page Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay
containing your logo or image.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the
overlay from the Overlay List box.
6
7
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When
Printing. If this box is checked, a message window
appears each time you submit a document for printing,
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on
your document.
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.
To save the document as an overlay, access printer
Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay
section.
WORLD BEST
2
3
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your
document.
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.
Click OK or Yes until printing begins.
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight
characters in the File name box. Select the destination
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).
The selected overlay downloads with your print job and
prints on your document.
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your
computer hard disk drive.
Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an
overlay with a watermark.
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.
Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay
List box.
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes
.
Click OK until you exit the Print window.
23
Advanced Printing
Advanced
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced
button.
4
Using Windows
PostScript Driver
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your
system CD-ROM to print a document.
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer
features and allow the computer to communicate with the
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the
supplied software CD-ROM.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need when using your
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can
review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
•
•
•
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the
paper loaded in the tray.
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for
your specific printing needs.
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript
options or printer features.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
NOTES
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in
the software application first, and change any remaining
settings using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are
using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
Using Help
You can click
then click on any setting.
from the upper right corner of the window, and
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
24
Using Windows PostScript Driver
5
Using Direct Printing
Utility
Printing
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility.
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF
files without having to open the files.
From the Direct Printing Utility window
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility
CAUTION
→
→
.
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry
printing.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on
your desk top.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.
2
3
and click Browse
.
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open
.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the
next column.
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct
Printing Utility program.
4
5
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file
to print it.
Click Print
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Using the shortcut icon
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
Overview Direct Printing Utility
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer
driver. It only supports PDF format.
NOTE
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.
To installing this program, you should select Custom
installation and put a check mark in this program when you
install the printer driver.
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.
Click Print
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
.
Using the right-click menu
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct
Printing
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is
added.
2
3
Select the printer you will use.
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the
below part.
4
Click Print
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
25
Using Direct Printing Utility
6
Sharing the Printer
Locally
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,
which is called “host computer,” on the network.
Setting Up a Host Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes
.
Double-click your printer driver icon
.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing
.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online
help.
Check the Share this printer box.
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK
.
NOTE
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
Setting Up a Client Computer
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search
for Computers
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password
of host computer account.)
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.
.
.
26
Sharing the Printer Locally
7
Scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the
files, display them on your web site or use them to create
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software
or the WIA driver.
Scanning Using Samsung
SmarThru Office
Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for
your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images
or documents from local or network scanners.
This chapter includes:
Using Samsung SmarThru Office
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru Office
:
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on
and properly connected to each other.
NOTE
:
Place your photograph or page on the document glass or
DADF (or ADF).
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-
ROM.
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you
will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved
depends upon various factors, including computer
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning,
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,
especially using enhanced dpi.
Double-click this icon.
The SmarThru Office window opens.
Tool bar
Working area
Send to bar
•Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate
the certain functions such as Scan Search, etc.
,
27
Scanning
•Working area
4
Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.
-
SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard
Adjust the scan settings.
Windows folder My Documents.
-
Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not
indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk
section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.
To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu
Preferences Index
→
→
.
It may take longer time to show the added file folders
according to the computer performance and the
number of added file folders.
NOTE
:
• To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must
install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.
• You can use indexing and searching functions using
SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.
This service is supported in Windows 2000 or above.
Click to start scanning.
NOTE
:
-
Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru
Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to
open the Scan Setting window easily.
the user’s files and folders.
- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected
folder.
•
Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.
Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate
application button.
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the
-
Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while
working within the SmarThru Office
To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you
must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,
which has been set up with your e-mail account.
SmarThru icon
in the tray area of the windows taskbar
.
to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.
-
-
Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server
while working within the SmarThru Office
.
Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network
fax machine while working within the SmarThru
Scan Setting lets you use the following services:
Office
.
•Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.
- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB
port, you can store the scanned output in image or
document file.
- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can
store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.
To use network scanner, your computer should install
the Scan Manager and register the scanner within
that program. Refer to Scanning chapter in user's
guide.
•Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for
Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.
•Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,
File Format, OCR Language.
5
To start scanning, click Scan.
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel
.
28
Scanning
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office
Scanning Using the WIA Driver
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard
components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver,
the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images
without using additional software.
applications are closed on your computer.
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs
.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall
SmarThru Office
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the
statement and click OK
Click Finish
.
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with
USB port.
3
4
.
.
Windows XP
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
Using Onscreen Help File
OR
For more information about SmarThru, click
at the top right
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select
corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and
allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru
program.
2
Settings
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and
Cameras
.
3
4
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and
Camera Wizard launches.
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to
see how your preferences affect the picture.
Scanning Process with TWAIN-
enabled Software
5
6
Click Next.
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and
destination to save the picture.
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it
as your TWAIN source in the application you use.
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it
is copied to your computer.
Windows Vista
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on
and properly connected to each other.
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
2
3
Click Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
OR
Scanners and Cameras
.
Place a single document face down on the document
glass.
Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows
Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.
3
4
5
Open an application, such as Photoshop.
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE
:
• To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and
cameras
.
•
If there is not Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the
application.
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.
4
5
Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened.
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to
see your preferences affect the picture.
6
Click Scan.
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.
29
Scanning
NOTE:
8
Using Smart Panel
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s
settings. Smart Panel is installed automatically when you
install the printer software.
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows
or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and
select your printer name
.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer
or Operating System in use.
NOTE:
• To use this program, you need:
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the
printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)
and various other information. You can also change settings.
- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that
are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer
User’s Guide.
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation
in HTML Help.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
1
1
Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)
shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in
use. Any printers do not have this feature.
Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears
automatically, showing the error.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status
bar (in Mac OS X).
Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
Troubleshooting Guide
You can view Help to solve problems.
Double-click this icon in Windows.
Printer Setting
You can configure various printer settings in the Printer Settings
Utility window. Any printers do not have this feature.
NOTE: If you connect your printer to a network, the
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the
Printer Settings Utility window.
Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)
Click this icon in Linux.
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need for using your
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs
Smart Panel
→
your printer driver name
→
.
30
Using Smart Panel
Opening the Troubleshooting
Guide
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for
error status problems.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide
.
Using Printer Settings Utility
Using the Printer Settings Utility, you can configure and check
print settings.
1
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Printer Setting
.
2
3
Change the settings.
To send the changes to the printer, click the Apply button.
NOTES: If your printer is connected to a network, the
SyncThru Web Service window appears instead of the
Printer Settings Utility window.
Using Onscreen Help File
For more information about Printer Settings Utility, click
.
Changing the Smart Panel Program
Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Options Select the settings you
.
want from the Options window.
31
Using Smart Panel
9
Using Your Printer in
Linux
Installing the Unified Linux
Driver
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root in the Login field and enter the system password.
This chapter includes:
2
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will
automatically run.
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
Getting Started
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to
mount is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh
The supplied CD-ROM provides you with Samsung’s Unified
Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux
computer.
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and
scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and
scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications
for configuring your machine and further processing of the
scanned documents.
If you still failed to run the CD-ROM, type the followings
in sequence:
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you
have an autorun software package installed and configured.
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR
system.
4
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and
flexible installation program. You don't need to search for
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
32
Using Your Printer in Linux
5
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root in the Login field and enter the system password.
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
2
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will
automatically run.
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to
mount is /mnt/cdrom,
The installation program has added the Unified Driver
Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver
group to the system menu for your convenience. If you
have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is
available through your system menu or can otherwise be
called from the driver package windows applications,
such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/
cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh
Manager
.
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you
have an autorun software package installed and configured.
NOTE: Installing the driver in the text mode:
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the
driver installation, you have to use the driver in the text
mode.
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./
install.sh, then follow the instruction on the terminal screen.
Then the installation completes.
3
4
Click Uninstall
Click Next
.
.
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation
instruction above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./
uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.
5
Click Finish.
33
Using Your Printer in Linux
Using SetIP program
Using the Unified Driver
Configurator
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC
address which is the hardware serial number of the network
printer card or interface. Especially, it is for the network
administrator to set several network IPs at the same time.
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and
scanner via a single I/O channel.
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is
connected to a network.
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the
printer driver installation.
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Starting the program
1
Print the machine’s network information report which
includes your machine’s MAC address.
Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
Opening the Unified Driver
Configurator
2
3
Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the
desktop.
4
Click
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver
configuration window.
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.
5
Configurator
.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the
corresponding configuration window.
NOTE: when you enter the MAC address, enter it without
colon(:).
Printers Configuration button
6
7
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all
the settings are correct.
Close the SetIP program.
Scanners Configuration button
Ports Configuration button
34
Using Your Printer in Linux
Printers Configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes
.
Printers Configuration button
Ports Configuration button
Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified
Driver Configurator window.
Switches to Printer
configuration.
Shows all of the
installed printer.
Shows the status,
model name and
URI of your printer.
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the
Unified Driver Configurator.
.
3
You can use the following printer control buttons:
•
•
•
•
Refresh: renews the available printers list.
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default
printer.
•
•
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the
machine is working properly.
•
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer
properties. For details, see page 37.
35
Using Your Printer in Linux
Classes Tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.
Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.
Shows all of the
printer classes.
Switches to
ports
configuration.
Shows all of the
available ports.
Shows the status of the
class and the number of
printers in the class.
Shows the port type,
device connected to
the port and status
•
•
•
Refresh : Renews the classes list.
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.
•
•
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.
Release port : Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device
properties, and scan images.
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these
devices via the single I/O port.
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP
device, while another block is in use.
Switches to
Scanners
configuration.
Shows all of the
installed scanners.
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.
Shows the vendor,
model name and type
of your scanner.
•
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties
and scan a document. See page 38.
36
Using Your Printer in Linux
Configuring Printer Properties
Printing a Document
Using the properties window provided by the Printers
configuration, you can change the various properties for your
machine as a printer.
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You
can print on your machine from any such application.
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
Select your machine on the available printers list and click
2
3
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the
File menu.
Properties
.
The Printer Properties window opens.
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your
machine from the Printer list and click Properties
.
.
Click.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•
General: allows you to change the printer location and
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the
printer list in Printers configuration.
•
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port
in this tab.
4
Change the printer and print job properties.
•
•
•
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default
device options.
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the
selected class.
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer
Properties Window.
37
Using Your Printer in Linux
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
•
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes
the number of pages per sheet.
Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
•Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your
desktop.
text options, such as spacing or columns.
•
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used
when printing images/files, such as color options, image
size, or image position.
2
3
Click the
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
Select the scanner on the list.
•Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper
source, and destination.
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties
window.
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the
status of your print job.
Click your
scanner.
To abort the current job, click Cancel
.
Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on
the list and is automatically selected.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files
If you have two or more scanners attached to your
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the
device options and start the image acquisition
simultaneously.
you want to print and click Open
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,
and change the printer and print job properties.
.
2
3
For details about the properties window, see page 37.
Click OK to start printing.
4
5
Click Properties.
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the
document glass.
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.
38
Using Your Printer in Linux
The document is scanned and the image preview appears
in the Preview Pane.
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image
and enter the file name.
12Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later
scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
Click Save As
Enter the name for your setting.
Click OK
Drag the pointer to
set the image area
to be scanned.
.
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down
list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-
down list.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan
Area sections.
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan
job.
•Image Quality: allows you to select the color
composition and the scan resolution for the image.
To delete a Job Type setting:
1
•
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size
manually.
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type
drop-down list.
2
Click Delete
.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about
The setting is deleted from the list
You can restore the default setting for the scan options
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.
by clicking Default
.
8
9
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,
click Cancel
.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager
tab.
Use these tools to
edit the image.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.
39
Using Your Printer in Linux
You can use the following tools to edit the image:
Tools Function
Saves the image.
Cancels your last action.
Restores the action you canceled.
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crops the selected image area.
Zooms the image out.
Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can
enter the size manually, or set the rate to
scale proportionally, vertically, or
horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can
select the number of degrees from the drop-
down list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or
contrast of the image, or to invert the
image.
Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer
to the onscreen help.
40
Using Your Printer in Linux
9
The message which warns all application will close on your
computer appears, Click Continue
10Select Typical installation for a local printer and then
click OK
.
10 Using Your Printer with
a Macintosh
.
NOTE: If you select Typical installation for a network
installation is finished.
Your printer supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB
interface or 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you
print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the driver by
installing the PPD file.
11After the installation is finished, click Quit.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications
in your Printer User’s Guide.
NOTE
:
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”
.
This chapter includes:
• Printing
Uninstalling software
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if
installation fails.
• Scanning
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.
Turn on your computer and printer.
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
Installing Software
The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the
PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple
LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer
which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a
Macintosh computer.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the Installer icon.
Enter the password and click OK
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall
The message which warns all application will close on your
computer appears, Click Continue
10When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.
.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a
Macintosh computer.
.
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.
Turn on your computer and printer.
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
.
4
5
6
7
8
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
Double-click the Installer icon.
Enter the password and click OK
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue
Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is
.
.
recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual
components to install.
41
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Using SetIP program
Setting Up the Printer
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC
address which is the hardware serial number of the network
printer card or interface. Especially, it is for the network
administrator to set several network IPs at the same time.
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the
network cable or the USB cable.
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is
connected to a network.
For a Network-connected Macintosh
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the
printer driver installation.
NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface.
:
Before connecting your printer, make sure that your
printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
NOTE: If you select Typical installation for a network
printer during the printer driver installation, the SetIP
program automatically runs after the installation. Follow the
below instruction.
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41
to install the PPD file on your computer.
1
2
The certificate window appears, click Trust.
Open the Applications folder
Setup Utility
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the
→
Utilities, and Print
Print the machine’s network information report which
includes your machine’s MAC address.
.
•
3
4
Click
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax
Click Add on the Printer List
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “
.
configuration window.
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.
3
4
.
•
+
” icon then a display
window will pop up.
For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.
NOTE: when you enter the MAC address, enter it without
colon(:).
•
•
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the
Bonjour
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the Bonjour
.
5
6
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all
the settings are correct.
Close the SetIP program.
.
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.
Starting the program
If you want to change your network printer IP setting, follow
the below instruction.
5
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name
.
•
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name
in Model
1
Print the machine’s network information report which
includes your machine’s MAC address.
.
2
Open the Library folder
printer model name
→
Printers
→
Samsung
→
Your
•
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name
→
SetIP
.
3
4
Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.
in Print Using
.
The certificate window appears, click Trust
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the
default printer.
5
Click
in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP
configuration window.
Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.
6
Click Add.
6
when you enter the MAC address, enter it without colon(:).
7
8
The machine prints the network information. Confirm all
the settings are correct.
Close the SetIP program.
42
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
For a USB-connected
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41
to install the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder
Setup Utility
For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the
→
Utilities, and Print
.
•
Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax
Click Add on the Printer List
For MAC OS 10.5, press the “
.
3
4
.
•
+
” icon then a display
window will pop up.
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.
•
•
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the
USB connection.
For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the USB
connection.
5
6
Select your printer name.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name
.
•
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name
in Model
.
•
For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Select a driver to use... and your printer name
in Print Using
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the
default printer.
7
Click Add.
43
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your
printer.
Printing
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
NOTE
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-
ROM.
NOTE: The setting options may differ depending on printers
and Macintosh OS version.
Layout
Printing a Document
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-
down list to access the following features.
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps
to print from a Macintosh.
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want
to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document
Setup in some applications).
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other
options and click OK
.
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
S
Mac OS 10.4
•
Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next
column.
•Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction
on a page as like the examples on UI.
S
Mac OS 10.3
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print
.
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which
pages you want to print.
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.
44
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Graphics
Printer Features
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics
form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic
features.
This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and
adjusting print quality. Select Printer Features from the
Presets' drop-down list to access the following features:
S
Mac OS 10.4
•
•
•
Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option
does not appear, your printer does not have this
feature.
S
Mac OS 10.4
Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print
job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital
document size. This can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
•
Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting
also may increase the time it takes to print a document.
RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are
rendered. Standard is the most widely used setting
which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of
standard monitor (sRGB Monitor). Vivid mode is
appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.
The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color
images than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best
used for printing fine lines, small characters and color
drawings. The color tone of Device mode may be
different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are
used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.
•
Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to
Color typically produces the best possible print quality
for color documents. If you want to print a color
document in grayscale, select Grayscale
.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,
select the corresponding paper type.
S
Mac OS 10.4
45
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
Duplex Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your
finished document. The binding options are:
•Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout
used in book binding.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
•
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with
calendars.
Select Layout
.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
Select the Layout
.
▲
Mac OS 10.3
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.
▲
Mac OS 10.3
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of
pages on one side of each page.
3
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing
option.
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the
paper.
5
4
CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and
:
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the
printer may not print the document in the way you
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the
same page will be printed on the front and back of one
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a
document and you want those copies on both sides of
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as
separate print jobs
.
46
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
For MAC OS X 10.5:
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside
Scanning
your machine in Bonjour Devices
.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X
10.4 procedure above.
You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.
Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.
6
7
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
Scanning with USB
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on
and properly connected to each other.
NOTE
:
• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant
softwares.
• For more information about using Image Capture, please
refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).
Start Applications and click Image Capture
.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates
propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or
higher.
4
5
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
Setting scan information in Scan
Manager.
You can find out about Scan Manager program information
and installed scan driver's condition. Also, you can change scan
settings and add or delete the folders where scanned
NOTE
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please
refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant
softwares.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
documents to computer are save in Scan Manager program.
• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant
1
2
Open Scan Manager in Smart Panel menu on Status
bar.
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update
Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates
propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or
higher.
Set Scan Button allows you to change the saving
destination and scan settings, add or delete application
program and format files. You can change the scanning
machine by using Change port. (Local or Network)
3
Press OK after setting is done.
Scanning with network
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).
3
4
5
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
Click Devices and click Browse Devices
.
For MAC OS X 10.4:
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure
that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click
Connect
.
47
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
SOFTWARE SECTION
INDEX
installing
Linux software 32
overlay
create 23
A
advanced printing, use 19
delete 23
print 23
L
B
Layout properties, set
Windows 15
booklet printing 20
P
Linux
Paper properties, set 16
paper size, set 16
paper source, set
Windows 16
paper tray, set
copy 25
poster, print 20
PostScript driver
installing 24
driver, install 32
orientation, print 38
paper size, set
print 38
paper source, set 38
paper type, set
print 38
print resolution 38
printer properties 37
printing 37
resolution
printing 38
scanning 38
C
canceling
scan 29
Color 17
D
document, print
Macintosh 44
print
document 14
fit to page 21
from Macintosh 44
from Windows 14
N-up
Macintosh 46
Windows 19
overlay 23
Windows 14
double-sided printing 21
E
M
Extras properties, set 17
Macintosh
driver
PRN 14
uninstall 41
printing 44
scaling 21
F
watermark 22
printer driver, install
Linux 32
printer properties
Linux 37
printer properties, set
Macintosh 44
printer resolution, set
Windows 17
printer software
install
favorites settings, use 18
scanning 47
setting up the printer 42
MFP driver, install
Linux 32
G
Graphics 17
Graphics properties, set 17
N
H
n-up printing
Macintosh 46
Windows 19
Macintosh 41
I
Windows
uninstall
install
O
Macintosh 41
Windows 12
printing
printer driver
orientation, print
Windows 15
Windows
48
booklets 20
double-sided 21
from Linux 37
S
scanning
Linux 38
SmarThru 27
TWAIN 29
WIA driver 29
scanning from Macintosh 47
setting
advanced option 17
color mode 17
darkness 17
favorites 18
resolution
Windows 17
software
install
Windows
reinstall
Windows 11
system requirements
uninstall
Macintosh 41
Windows 12
status monitor, use 30
T
TWAIN, scan 29
U
uninstall, software
Macintosh 41
Windows 12
uninstalling
MFP driver
Linux 33
Using 22
W
watermark
create 22
delete 22
edit 22
print 22
WIA, scan 29
49
|
Sanyo Pnr Xs2432 User Manual
NEC NP PA571W User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics P500ymf C User Manual
Hampton Bay Wireless Doorbell User Manual
EMERSON RC212 User Manual
DIMPLEX LPC User Manual
DELL ULTRASHARP U2719DC 02 User Manual
DELL S2330MX User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 536.797470 User Manual
BLACK DECKER GCO1440 User Manual